Complete Solution for Motor Protection
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Complete Solution for Motor Protection
The content of this publication is subject to change
without notice. Larsen & Toubro Limited reserves the
right to make product-improvement changes which
may or may not be re ected in this publication. Larsen
& Toubro Limited is not responsible for any inadvertent
admissions, omissions, or errors. Larsen & Toubro
Limited assumes no liability for damages arising out of,
or in connection with, the application or use of any
product or application described herein.
Rev. C
Released Date - September, 2016
L&T Electrical & Automation
Electrical Systems & Equipment
Head of ce
7C, TC II, Tower B, L&T Business Park,
L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai,
Mumbai 400 072, India
© 2016 Larsen & Toubro Limited. All rights reserved.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
1.0
PREFACE
Manual Overview
Version
Purpose of This Manual
Safety and General Information
Conventions and Nomenclature
Conventions
Nomenclatures
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
2.0
INTRODUCTION
About the Relay
Reasons for Motor Protections
Product Overview
Relay Main unit
Status of LED Indication
Current Module (CM)
Display unit
DIO Expansion unit
LED Indication on expansion unit
MCOMP Order Codes
Getting Started
05
06
06
07
07
07
08
08
08
09
09
11
3.0
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Dimensions
Type Tests
Certi cations
Environmental Conditions
Relay Elements
Metering
Monitoring
12
13
14
15
15
15
16
18
18
4.0
INSTALLATION
Overview
Mechanical Installation
Dimensions
Main unit Dimensions
CM 1 Dimensions
CM 2-5 Dimensions
DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
Display Dimensions
Product Identi cation Label
Mounting
Relay Mounting
CM Mounting
Display Mounting
DIO Expansion Module Mounting
19
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
Electrical Installation
Relay Main Unit Wiring
3 Phase Voltage Connections
3-Phase Current Connections
Con guration Port Connection
RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections
Communication Port Connection
Auxiliary Power Supply Connection
Digital Input Connections
Digital Output Connections
Current Module (CM) Wiring
Display Wiring
Expansion Unit Wiring
5.0
METERING AND MONITORING
Overview
Metering
Current Based Metering
RMS Line Current
Earth Fault Current
Average RMS Current
Thermal Capacity
Current Unbalance
Voltage Based Metering
RMS Line Voltage
RMS Phase Voltage
Average RMS Voltage
Frequency
Power and Energy Based Metering
Power
Energy
Power Factor
Miscellaneous Parameter
Temperature
Digital Input/Output Status
COMPlogic output Status
Monitoring
Motor Speci c Data Monitoring
Phase Sequence
Motor Starting Time
CM Type
Number of Starts
Number of Stops
Motor Run Hours
Total Motor Run Hours
Starting Peak Current
Annunciations
24
25
26
26
27
28
28
30
30
31
31
33
35
37
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
6.0
PROTECTIONS
Overview
Thermal Protection
Overload (49)
Current Based Protection
Over current Protection (50P)
Under current Protection (37)
Current unbalance Protection (46)
Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)
Locked Rotor Protection (50LR)
IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)
Phase Loss Protection (47A)
Voltage Based Protection
Over voltage Protection (59)
Under voltage Protection (27)
Voltage unbalance Protection (47)
Phase reversal Protection (47B)
Frequency Based Protection
Under frequency Protection (81L)
Over frequency Protection (81H)
Advanced Features
Re-acceleration (27LV)
Temperature Monitoring
Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66)
Fail to Stop Protection
Interlock 1 to 12
Communication Failure Monitoring
Excessive Start Time Protection
Analog Input Monitoring
41
42
43
43
46
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
49
50
50
51
51
51
51
51
51
53
54
54
54
54
54
54
7.0
COMMUNICATION
Overview
Communication Interface
Communication Protocol
Modbus RTU
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Modbus RTU Settings
Modbus memory map
Pro bus DP
Pro bus Settings
Pro bus memory map
Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus TCP/IP Settings
Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
Parameter Mapping
Status Word
Communication Architecture
Modbus Architecture
Pro bus Architecture
56
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
58
59
59
59
59
60
60
62
62
62
62
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
8.0
9.0
SETTINGS
Overview
Setting Parameters
System Setting Parameters
Protection Setting Parameters
Digital Input Output Setting Parameters
Basic Digital Input/Output
DIO Expansion Module
Digital Input Settings
Digital Output Settings
Analog Output Settings
Communication Setting Parameters
COMPlogic Setting Parameters
COMPlogic Modules
Truth Table
Signal Conditioner
Counters
Timers
List of logical Inputs
Relay Con guration
Relay Con guration through the Display
Relay Con guration through MCOMP suite
Relay Con guration through Communication
Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using
Motor data
Case 1:
Solution:
Case 2:
Solution:
Setting Sheet
System Settings
Protection Settings
Communication Settings
DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)
Parameter Mapping Settings
COMPlogic Settings
64
65
65
65
69
69
69
69
70
72
73
74
74
74
74
74
75
76
77
78
78
80
82
82
82
82
83
83
85
85
87
91
91
115
115
USER INTERFACE
Overview
MCOMP Suite Interface
Installation Guide
.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation
Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation
MCOMP Suite Installation
Operation Guide
MCOMP Suite Con guration
Monitoring Mode
Con guration Mode
Display Interface
Operation Guide
Metering
119
120
120
120
120
122
123
124
124
125
132
144
144
145
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
Settings
View Records
Commands
Display Settings
Connect to PC
10.0
146
147
148
148
149
TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Overview
Testing
Connection Setup Requirement
Metering testing
Phase current and voltage:
Power, Energy & Power factor:
Protection Testing
Troubleshooting
Special Commands
Inhibit Status
Motor Stop Cause
150
151
151
151
151
151
151
151
152
153
154
154
Memory Maps
Overview
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map
Trip Record Table
Event Record Table
Table A-3. Event Record Cause Table
B] Pro bus memory map
Cyclic Data
Data Representation
Data Modules available in GSD le
Acyclic Data
C] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
156
157
157
169
172
172
176
176
180
189
190
192
Application Notes
Overview
A] Starter Application
DOL Starter
RDOL Starter
STAR/DELTA Starter
B] Non Motor Load Application
C] Re-acceleration Application
D] 3P-3W, 3P-4W Application
E] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input)
Application
F] Winding Heating Application
G] Analog Output Application
H] Pro bus Communication Application
I] Protection Function Application
Thermal Overload Case Study
Locked Rotor Protection
J] Watchdog Application
K] Single Phase Motor Application
218
218
218
218
219
220
221
221
222
223
223
223
224
227
227
229
229
231
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PREFACE
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
1
PREFACE
Manual Overview
Safety and General Information
The MCOMP Instruction Manual provides complete information
necessary to install, operate, and maintain the MCOMP Relay and
its accessory components.
This manual uses following safety statements:
An overview of each section of this manual is as follows:
Preface: Describes the manual organization, Safety & General
Information and conventions & nomenclatures used in this
manual.
DANGER
WARNING
Introduction: Provides a brief overview of the product and the
manual.
Speci cations: Lists the Relay technical speci cations.
Installation: Describes mechanical installation and electrical
wiring of the Relay.
Metering and Monitoring: Describes the operation and
calculation of each metering functions.
Protection: Describes the operating characteristics of each
protection element provided in the Relay.
Communication: Describes communication interface and
protocols supported by the Relay.
Settings: Describes the different setting parameters meaning
with its use and how to enter settings into the relay. It also de nes
the setting sheet describing all the settings available in the relay.
User Interface: Describes how to con gure the Relay through
local interface using MCOMP Suite and the Display.
Testing and Troubleshooting: Describes the common problems
encountered during the Relay testing and various troubleshooting
techniques.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Immediate Hazard.
SEVERE personal injury or death WILL result.
Hazards or unsafe practices.
SEVERE personal injury or death MAY result.
Hazards or unsafe practices.
MINOR personal injury or damage to products or
property MAY result.
Essential advisory information.
Additional or explanatory information.
Conventions and Nomenclature
Conventions
In this manual,
Relay refers to MCOMP Main Unit
Display Unit refers to MCOMP Display Unit
CM refers to MCOMP Current Module
Expansion unit refers to add-on DIO/AI unit
Version
This is revision C release of the manual by Larsen & Toubro Ltd.
Purpose of This Manual
This manual intends to help the users of the MCOMP Relay, to
operate, maintain and troubleshoot the device. It may be used by
following users:
Design and Planning Engineers
System Integrators
Maintenance Engineers
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
2
PREFACE
Nomenclatures
Following are the different Nomenclature and their descriptions
used in this Manual.
Nomenclatures
Descriptions
CAT
Category
CBCT
Core Balance Current Transformer
CM
Current Module
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
DCS
Distributed Control System
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI
Digital Input
DIN
German Institute for Standardization
DIO
Digital Input/Output
DO
Digital Output
DOL
Direct On Line
DP
Decentralized Peripherals
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory
EWS
Engineering Work Station
FS
System Frequency
GSD
General Station Description
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
IEF
Set Value for Earth Fault Current
IFLC
Full Load Current
IOC
Instantaneous Over Current
IR
Running Current
ISET
Set Value for Over load curve
LCS
Local Control System
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LRC
Longitudinal Redundancy Check
LSB
Least Significant Bit
MFLA
Multiple of Full Load Current
MSB
Most Significant Bit
OLED
Organic Light Emitting Diode
PTC
Positive Temperature Coefficient
PWR/COMM
Power/Communication
RDOL
Reverse Direct On Line
RMS
Root Mean Square
Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
3
PREFACE
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit
SCADA
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
TCC
Trip Curve Characteristics
TCP/IP
Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TM
Thermal Memory
Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description
Suggestions for Improving this Manual
For any feedback to improve this manual and its contents, kindly contact at ESE-CMT@LNTEBG.com.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
4
INTRODUCTION
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
5
INTRODUCTION
About the Relay
MCOMP is designed as a reliable building block for Motor Control
Centres (MCCs) and a product designed to provide complete
motor protection. It covers conventional & advanced motor
protection, metering and annunciation in MCC feeders into
single, easy to con gure, compact communicating module with a
optional OLED Display. The MCOMP is used as a protection
controller for Low Voltage Contactor Controlled Motor Starter
Feeders.
are designed to monitor key parameters of the motor to alert
the operator of a condition of outage or damage.
Varying Starting Condition
The protection controller must be able to differentiate
between starting condition and running condition.
Reasons for Motor Protections
During starting condition, a LV motor (up to 300 KW) has
starting current of about 550-700 % of its full load current,
with a starting time usually ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.
Electric motors are the major operands of any industry. These
motors come in with a wide variety of ratings, types and
applications. Depending on the criticality of the process or
application, the motor protection is selected.
It should be able to monitor pre-start conditions of the motor
to prevent starting of motor under unfavorable conditions like
inadequate thermal capacity available and voltage
unhealthiness.
Motor Protection is required for the following reasons:
It should check the pre-start, starting and running conditions
of the motor completely for safe operation of the motor.
Varying Input Voltages and Load Currents
Motor is a rotating equipment and its performance is
dependent on the availability of tolerable levels of input
voltages and variable loads. Faults occur when either of these
parameters uctuates. Therefore, motor protection controllers
MCOMP as a Microprocessor Equipped Intelligent Controller,
allows a user to set parameters of the motor according to the
application and process requirements.
Based on the instantaneous measurement of the parameters,
MCOMP monitors different conditions of the motor as shown in
Table 2-1.
Condition of Motor Possible Irregularities
Pre-start: Before the
motor starts (inhibit
conditions)
Starting: After START
input is given or is
sensed till the motor
picks up speed
Action by MCOMP
Under-voltage on the supply side.
Prevents starting of the motor on under-voltage lockout.
Not cooled enough for next start.
Prevents starting of the motor until the thermal memory
(thermal capacity) falls below a certain value.
Frequent starting / Number of starts per defined time
Prevents starting of the motor until a inhibit period is elapsed.
Not reset after Trip
Prevents starting of the motor until it is reset.
Any of the Digital Input is selected as Stop Input,
and is low.
Prevents starting of the motor until Stop Input is high.
Exceed set starting time
Relay trips the motor due to Excessive Start Time protection.
Contactor feedback is not available even after START
command is given for a specified amount of time.
Relay stops the motor due to contactor feedback fault when
one of the DI is configured as feedback.
Over-heating of the winding and insulation (Overload).
Running: Motor runs
in a stable manner
Jamming (Locked Rotor).
Current is considerably lower than the running current.
Relay indicates an alarm and trips the motor if the
irregularity continues for an amount of time due to
the corresponding protection.
Supply voltage goes low.
Leakage current flows in the motor (Earth Fault).
Supply frequency is not proper (under and over-frequency).
One of the supply phases is disconnected (Phase Loss).
Starting and running
conditions
Number of starts exceeds permitted number within a
certain period.
Relay indicates alarm and trips the motor if the irregularity
continues for set amount of time (or instantaneous) due to
the corresponding protection.
Sequence of the 3-phase supply is changed (Phase Reversal).
Table 2-1: Motor Conditions
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
6
INTRODUCTION
Flexible protection, control and communication options to
suit any Low Voltage (LV) contactor controlled motor starter
application.
processor, input/output board, voltage sensing module and
communication module in a single modular enclosure. The
current module gets connected to the Relay unit for current
sensing. The Relay is further provided with bi/tri color LED
indicators. There is also a reset push button available for local trip
reset.
Integrated push button and LED indicators reduce external
components and wiring.
There are mainly three variants of the Relay main unit depending
on selection of communication protocol:
Flexibility to choose from various standard communication
protocols allow affordable integration to larger and complex
Substation monitoring & control systems.
1. Modbus RTU
Product Overview
The MCOMP facilitates following bene ts to users:
The Relay comes with its own high accuracy current module
eliminating the three conventional CTs required for each
phase. The built in 4-20 mA Analog Output eliminates the
2. Pro bus
3. Modbus TCP/IP
Refer MCOMP order codes section for all possible variants of
MCOMP relay.
Table 2-2 shows the LED status description.
need of transducer for remote metering. This reduces the
overall module size making it more compact and cost
effective.
Reset push button is available on the Relay and the Display
thereby reducing the need for one DI to be con gured as
Reset (Auto reset option is available for thermal overload and
under-voltage protection).
The optional OLED Display is provided with the Relay for
display of all metering, protection and setting parameters.
Conformal coating on the PCB inside the Relay resists the
corrosive environment, hazardous chemicals, dust, etc,. and
increases the life & reliability of the product.
LED Indications on Main unit
One LED for Fault:
Glows Red when the Relay senses Trip condition.
One Tri-color LED for Motor status RUN/STOP/INHIBIT
Glows Green when the Relay senses the motor is OFF and
ready to START.
Glows Red when the Relay senses the motor is ON.
Glows Amber when the Relay senses the motor is in INHIBIT
mode.
One Bi-color LED for Alarm/Pickup
Relay Main unit
Glows Amber when Alarm condition is sensed by the Relay.
This is a self-contained and fully functional unit housing the main
Glows Red when Pickup condition is sensed by the Relay.
Relay Main Unit
Display Unit
FRC Cable
Expansion DIO Unit
CM Unit
Display Cable
Expansion Unit Cable
Figure 2.1 Product overview
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
7
INTRODUCTION
Reset Button
Resets the Trip condition of the Relay.
Resets the Relay to default settings when pressed for 3
seconds and released.
Drive
LED s
Status of the Drive
Drive Status
Alarm/Pick up
Trip
Running
RED
X
OFF
Alarm
X
AMBER
OFF
Pickup
X
RED
OFF
Trip
AMBER
OFF
RED
Inhibit
AMBER
X
X
Ready to Start
GREEN
X
OFF
Table 2-2: LED Status Description
Note: X Does not matter
Current Module (CM)
Display unit
CM, provided with MCOMP, is used for 3-phase current sensing in
motor starters ranging from 0.375 kW. Requisite connecting
cable for connection of CM to the Relay is supplied along with the
CM. Only one CM is required (up to 45 kW) for metering and
protection, reducing the space which is required for conventional
CTs in the module.
The OLED Display is a detachable optional unit provided with the
MCOMP for display of metering, protection and motor-speci c
parameters. The Display can additionally be used to con gure the
Relay. The OLED Display is also provided with micro-USB front
port to enable local parameterization through laptop using
MCOMP Suite provided with the Relay.
There are two different sizes of CM, covering ve different current
ranges as shown in Table 2 3.
DIO Expansion unit
Note: *When MCOMP is used with external conventional CT, it is
required to enable the external CT ratio setting. In this case the
starting range for IFLC is 50% of the primary current value set in the
external CT ratio setting. 50A mentioned in Table 2-3 is considering
the by default primary current as 100A in external CT ratio setting. If
primary current value changes, starting IFLC value changes accordingly.
While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC of the
motor speci ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range.
Motor rating in kW speci ed above is with considering approximate
scale factor of 1.8 between motor rating and IFLC. For IFLC range higher
than 80A, conventional CTs are required along with MCOMP CM. CM1
and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional CT is 1 A and 5 A
respectively.
The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit provided with
MCOMP for increasing the count of Digital/Analog input and
digital output as per application requirement. The expansion unit
comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4 digital inputs &
2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital inputs & 2
analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs. Depending
on the requirement of number of DI/DO or AI, suitable expansion
module can be selected. The requisite connection cable of 0.4m
length comes along with expansion module. Maximum three
expansion modules can be connected to a single relay main unit.
Refer table 8-10 in chapter Settings for details of all possible
combination of DIO expansion unit connection to relay main unit.
CM Type
IFLC Range
Motor Rating for 415V System
CM - 1
0.6 to 2.0 A
0.375 to 1.125 kW
CM - 2
1.8 to 5.4 A
1 to 3 kW
CM 3
4.5 to 13.5 A
2.5 to 7.5 kW
CM 4
12.6 to 37.8 A
7 to 21 kW
CM - 5
36 to 80 A
20 to 45 kW
With external conventional CT
50* to 600 A
Up to 333 kW
Table 2-3: CM Type and Range
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
8
INTRODUCTION
LED s for DI/DO status:
LED Indications on Expansion unit
Glows Red when corresponding DI/DO status is high / energized
state.
One LED for Power (PWR):
Glows Green when the expansion unit gets power from relay
main unit.
Test Button (T):
Tests the DI/DO circuitry and corresponding LEDs by switching
it ON and OFF. It is recommended to use this button only when
drive is in stop condition and 3 phase voltage is not available to
the drive/motor.
One LED for Communication status (COMM):
Glows Red when communication between the Relay main unit
and expansion module is healthy.
MCOMP Order Codes
Part number selection
MAIN UNIT
U
Auxiliary Voltage
P
YI
MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER
R
MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R
O
Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)
D
24 V DC
Communication
R
Modbus RTU
T
Modbus TCP/IP
P
Profibus DP
Voltage sensing for
Digital Input Card
UI
Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)
YI
230 V AC/DC
ZI
110 V AC/DC
DI
24 V DC
R
P
Temperature Input
RTD Input Port
PTC Input Port
Table 2-4: Main unit order code
CURRENT MODULE
Part number selection
C1
CM Type
CM
Main unit Cable
H
MCOMP CURRNET MODULE PART NUMBER
MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_H
C1
CM Type 1 ( Iflc : 0.6 2 A)
C2
CM Type 2 ( Iflc : 1.8 5.4 A)
C3
CM Type 3 ( Iflc : 4.5 13.5 A)
C4
CM Type 4 ( Iflc : 12.6 37.8 A)
C5
CM Type 5 ( Iflc : 36 80 A)
S
H
M
1
Cable of 0.3 m
Cable of 0.5 m
Cable of 0.75 m
cable of 1 m
Table 2-5: Current Module order code
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
9
INTRODUCTION
Part number selection
DISPLAY UNIT
D1
Auxiliary Voltage
Display
MCOMP DISPLAY UNIT PART NUMBER
1
MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
D1
Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)
D2
24 V DC
Main unit Cable
H
Cable of 0.5 m
1
Cable of 1 m
2
Cable of 2 m
Table 2-6: Display Unit order code
Part number selection
EXPANSION UNIT
A
Module Type
Voltage sensing for
Digital Input Card
YI
MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER
H
MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_H
A
4DI/2DO Expansion Unit
B
8DI Expansion Unit
C
5DI/2AI Expansion Unit
UI
Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)
YI
230 V AC/DC
ZI
110 V AC/DC
DI
24 V DC
Expansion Main
unit cable
H
Cable of 0.4 m
Table 2-7: Expansion Unit order code
ACCESSORIES/
LOOSE CABLES
Part number selection
MCOMP LOOSE CABLE PART NUMBER
B
MCOMP_LOOSE_CABLE_B
Cable Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Display Main unit cable of 0.5 m
Display Main unit cable of 1.0 m
Display Main unit cable of 2.0 m
CM Main unit cable of 0.5 m
CM Main unit cable of 1.0 m
Expansion Main unit cable of 0.4 m
CM - Main unit cable of 0.3 m
CM - Main unit cable of 0.75 m
Table 2-8: Accessories order code
Note: While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC
of the motor speci ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range. For
IFLC range higher than 81A, conventional CTs are required along with
MCOMP CM. CM1 and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional
CT is 1 A and 5 A respectively.
Above selection of MCOMP units and accessories is applicable for at
lid (ZX8* series CAT numbers) MCOMP relays. Ordering information of
earlier version of MCOMP units and CM units with dimensions 67 x
59.3 x 55 (D x W x H) for CM-1 module & 109.2 x 107.8 x 60 for CM 2-5
modules is available upon request.
While selecting main unit, 24 VDC voltage digital input card can be
selected only if auxiliary voltage is selected as 24 VDC.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
10
INTRODUCTION
Getting Started
For understanding the full functionality of the Relay a basic
knowledge is required. It includes powering-up the Relay, setting
date & time for recording of events/trips records.
The steps to be followed are shown below:
1. For powering-up the Relay, check for the power supply
requirement mentioned on the side label: 80-240 V AC/DC or
24 V DC.
2. Check for polarity of power supply as L/+ (Relay terminal
72/Display terminal 75) and N/- (Relay terminal 71/Display
terminal 76) on the Relay/ Display.
3. Once powered on, the motor status LED on the Relay and
PWR/COMM LED on the Display glows.
4. If Display is present in the system, ensure a proper connection
is established between the Relay and the Display. After
connection, the Display shows L&T logo screen followed by
metering screen within 3 seconds. This ensures healthy
communication between the Relay and the Display.
5. Set date and time of the Relay from Display Menu (Refer
System Settings in chapter User Interface) or from special
commands in MCOMP Suite (Refer Special Commands in
chapter User Interface).
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
11
SPECIFICATIONS
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
12
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Full Load Current Setting (IFLC)
Setting Range
0.6 - 600 A
Rated Voltage Setting (VL-L)
Setting Range
380 800 V
Power Supply
Aux Supply Voltage
For universal Aux supply:
AC: 110 - 240V
DC: 110 - 220V
For 24 VDC Aux supply:
24 VDC
Operational Aux Supply Voltage
For universal Aux supply:
AC: 70-265 VAC,
DC: 93-265 VDC
For 24 VDC Aux supply:
18-28 VDC
Power Consumption
Main unit:
For universal Aux supply : ~ 20VA or 20W
For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 18W
(Above power consumption values are including two expansion units connected to main unit)
Display unit:
For universal Aux supply : ~ 5VA or 5W
For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 5W
Frequency and Phase Sequence (settable)
System Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Phase Sequence
RYB or RBY
Digital Inputs
Inputs
Optically Isolated
Sensing Range (current consumption and
sure-ON voltage of DI channel)
Sure On voltages (AC):
Sure Off voltages (AC):
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 63VAC (3mA)
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 53VAC
2] 110 V AC/DC card = 73VAC (3mA)
2] 110 V AC/DC card = 61VAC
3] 240V AC/DC card = 144VAC (2.5mA)
3] 240V AC/DC card = 122VAC
Sure On voltages (DC):
Sure Off voltages (DC):
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 75VDC (3mA)
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 65VDC
2] 110 V AC/DC = 80VDC (3.1mA)
2] 110 V AC/DC = 71VDC
3] 240V AC/DC = 184VDC (2.6mA)
3] 240V AC/DC = 168VDC
4] 24V DC = 18VDC (2.2mA)
4] 24V DC = 16VDC
Table 3-1 (1): General Speci cations
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Digital Output Contacts
Base unit have all Form C contacts
Expansion unit have all Form A contacts
Rated Current
10 A on 240 V AC
10 A on 24 V DC
Maximum Breaking Capacity AC
2400 VA
Life expectancy
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. (at 18,000 operations/hr under no load)
Electrical: 100,000 operations average. (at 1,800 operations/hr under rated load)
Digital output operating time
Pickup time - 4.8 ms
Drop off time - 4.4 ms
Analog Output
Current Output
4 20 mA
Accuracy
±5 %
Max. Load
200 Ohms
Isolation
2500 V
Assignable Parameters
Voltage, Current, Power, Temperature, Frequency
Analog Input
Input Range
4 20 mA/0 20 mA (user selectable)
Accuracy
±1 % of full scale value
Resolution
12 bits
Input shunt resistance
50 Ohms
Max Input Current (Destructive)
24 mA
Conversion time
600 ms
Temperature Input
Input Type
RTD (PT-100) or PTC Thermistor
Communication Ports
Micro-USB
RJ 11 (RS 485 support)
4 Terminal Screw Type (RS 485 support)
DB9 Connector
RJ 45 port
Protocol
1 on display front
1 for MCOMP suite/display communication
1 in case of Modbus serial communication
1 in case of Profibus communication
1 in case of Modbus TCP/IP communication
Modbus or Profibus-DP or Modbus TCP/IP
Table 3-1 (2): General Speci cations
Dimensions
Component
Depth (mm)
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Relay
103.95
92
120
Display
35
96
51
CM 1
67
59.3
55
CM 2 to CM 5
109.2
107.8
60
Expansion Unit
102
83
70
Table 3-2: Dimensions
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
14
SPECIFICATIONS
Type Tests
Tests
Standard
Test Level
Cold
IEC 60068-2-1
-20oC, 72 Hours
Temperature Cycling
IEC 60068-2-14
-20oC to 70oC, 3 hrs, 2 cycles
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 150 Hz, 1G
Dry Heat
IEC 60068-2-2
-20oC to 70oC, 3hrs
Damp Heat
IEC 60068-2-30
55oC, 6 cycles, 24 hrs/cycle, 95% relative humidity
Shock Resistance
IEC 60255-21-2
30G, 18 shocks
Bump
25G, 6000 bumps
Enclosure Protection
IP 41 enclosed in a panel
Dielectric
IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.4)
2kV, 1 min
Impulse
IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.3)
4kV
Voltage Dip and Interruption
IEC 61000-4-11
Class A
Insulation Resistance
IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.2.2)
500 VDC, 5 sec
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2, edition 1.2, 2001-04
8kV air discharge 6kV contact discharge
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
Severity Level 3 Field Strength 10 V/m
Fast Transient, Burst Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
4kV @ 5kHz
Surge Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
4kV line-to-earth
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
Severity Level 3 Voltage level: 10 Vrms
High Frequency Disturbance Immunity
IEC 61000-4-18
1kV, 3 pulses
Conducted Emission
CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005
Radiated Emission
CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005
Table 3-3: Type Tests
Certifications
Certification
ISO: Relay is designed and manufactured using ISO 9001 certified quality program.
CE: CE Mark- Low Voltage Directive, EMC Directive.
PNO: Relay is certified with PNO certificate from Profibus International for Profibus variant of the Relay.
Table 3-4: Certi cations
Environmental Conditions
Environmental Conditions
Typical conditions under which the Relay is designed to operate:
Temperature
-20 to 70 °C (operating)
-40 to 85 °C (storage) Since the equipment consist of Electrolytic
capacitors, it is advised to Power ON the relay continuously at least
for an hour in period of one year.
Supply Voltage Fluctuation
10 % of nominal voltage
Relative Humidity
5 to 95 %
Table 3-5: Environmental Conditions
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Elements
Relay Elements
Overload (49)
Setting Range
20 100 % IFLC
Thermal Memory Reset Value
5 30 %
Locked Rotor (50LR)
Setting Range
150 1000 % IFLC
Trip Delay
0.5 30 sec
Phase Reversal (47B)
Setting Range
RYB or RBY
Trip Delay
Instantaneous
Phase Loss (47A)
Trip Delay
0.1 30 sec
Earth Fault (50N or 50 SG)
Type
Vector Sum or CBCT
Setting Range
Vector Sum = 20-500% IFLC
Trip Delay
0.1 60 sec
CBCT = 0.1-20 A Primary
Excessive Start Time
Setting Range
1 200 sec
Mode
Enable/Disable
Max Number of Starts (66)
Setting Range
15 60 min
Number of permissive starts
1 30
Inhibit Period
1 120 min
Under Current (37)
Setting Range
30 85 % Ir
Trip Delay
1 120 sec
Over Current (50P)
Setting Range
50 1000 % IFLC
Trip Delay
0.1 10 sec
Under Voltage (27)
Setting Range
20 85 % VN
Trip Delay
0.2 25 sec
Current Unbalance (46)
Setting Range
5 100 % IFLC
Trip Delay
1 30 sec
Table 3-6 (1): Relay Elements
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
16
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Unbalance (47)
Setting Range
5 50 % VN
Trip Delay
0.2 20 sec
Over Voltage (59)
Setting Range
101 130 % VN
Trip Delay
0.2 25 sec
Under Frequency (81L)
Setting Range
94 98 % FS
Trip Delay
1 30 sec
Over Frequency (81H)
Setting Range
101 105 % FS
Trip Delay
1 30 sec
Over Frequency (81H)
Type : RTD or PTC
1 Pt-100 RTD or max. 6 PTC in series
Reacceleration (27LV)
Voltage Dip
20 90 % VN
Voltage Restoration
65 95 % VN
Restart Time
0.2 60 sec
Restart Delay
4 1200 sec
Communication Failure
Setting Range
2 10 sec
Trip Delay
1 30 sec
Trip only in Remote
Enable/Disable
Time Delayed Phase Over Current (51P) Stage 1 and Stage 2
Setting Range
20 1000 % IFLC
Time Constant
0.5 600 sec
IEC Curves
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Time Delayed Neutral Over Current (51N) Stage 1 and Stage 2
Setting Range
20 1000 % IFLC
Time Constant
0.5 600 sec
IEC Curves
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Analog Input (Trip/Alarm)
Setting Range
0/4 20mA
Trip Delay
1 30 sec
Mode of reset
Local / Auto / Communication / Remote
Table 3-6 (2): Relay Elements
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
17
SPECIFICATIONS
Metering
Metering Specifications
Line Currents Measurement Range
0 6000A with accuracy + 1% from 0.5 times IFLC to 1.5 times IFLC and beyond that + 5%
Earth fault current measurement range
+ 1% or + 50mA whichever is greater
Phase Voltages Measurement Range
0 600V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage
Line Voltages Measurement Range
0 1000V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage
Analog input measurement
0 / 4 20mA with ± 1% of full scale value up to 20mA and ±5% after 20mA till 24mA.
System Frequency
+ 1%
Active, Reactive, Apparent Power
+ 5%
Active, Reactive, Apparent Energy
+ 5%
Power Factor
0.9 to 1 with + 2%
0.707 to 0.9 with + 3%
0.5 to 0.707 with + 5%
Thermal Capacity
+ 2%
Temperature Measurement Range
0°C to +180°C in case of RTD, ±3o C
0 to 10K in case of PTC
Table 3-7: Metering Speci cations
Monitoring
Monitoring Specifications
Records
Stores last five event records with date and time stamp.
Stores last five trip records with date and time stamp. Record gets stored with current, voltage, temperature,
frequency values present at the time of tripping.
Stores last stop cause
Hour Meter
Records and stores last operational hours and total operation hours
Operation Counters
Records and stores number of starts, stops and trips of the drive
Starting Curve
Records and stores the starting characteristics of the drive
Starting Time
Records and stores the start time taken
Starting Current
Records the peak current taken during starting of the drive
DIO Status
Shows real time status of digital input and output of the relay
Table 3-8: Monitoring Speci cations
Note: The Specifications are subject to change without notice.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
18
INSTALLATION
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
19
INSTALLATION
Overview
This section provides information about the installation of the
Relay and the various connections attaching to the ports of the
Relay, CM, Display and DIO Expansion Module.
The user must be familiar with all con gurations and features in
the Relay before installing, for safe installation and connection.
Mechanical Installation
This section provides description about the Mechanical
Installation of the Relay along with the dimensions and product
labels. These dimensions help in identifying proper installation
space for the Relay and its wiring connections.
Dimensions
The complete relay product package consists of the Relay, CM,
Expansion Module and the Display. The dimensions of all the units
are mentioned below. Some units may or may not be present
depending on the ordering by the end user. Figure 4 1 to Figure
4 5 shows the dimensions in diagrams.
Component
Depth (mm)
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Relay
103.95
92
120
Display
35
96
51
CM 1
67
59.3
35
CM 2 to CM 5
109.2
107.8
35
Expansion Unit
102
83
70
Main Unit Dimensions
LEGEND
MM
103.95
120
103.95
92
92
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
Figure 4-1: Main Unit Dimension
CM 1 Dimensions
35
LEGEND
MM
35
67
59.3
59.3
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
Figure 4-2: CM 1 Dimensions
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
20
INSTALLATION
CM 2-5 Dimensions
35
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
35
109.2
107.8
LEGEND
MM
107.8
TOP VIEW
Figure 4-3: CM 2-5 Dimensions
LEGEND
MM
84
102
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
70
102
DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
TOP VIEW
Figure 4-4: DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
Display Dimensions
35
96
51
35
PWR/COMM
LEGEND
MM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
Mini USB Port
RST
ENT
L
N
96
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
Figure 4-5: Display Dimensions
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
21
INSTALLATION
Product Identification Label
The product identi cation label gives information about the
product model, serial number, and revision number. It is located
on the side of the units. Figure 4 6 shows format of the product
identi cation label.
Procedure:
1. Before mounting the Relay, ensure that power supply to
control panel is disconnected and the relay is free from all
power connections.
2. Pull the DIN Clip.
3. Position the Relay on the DIN Rail properly.
4. Push the DIN Clip to x the Relay.
5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the Relay.
CM Mounting
CM is mounted on the 15mm DIN Rail provided in the motor
starter module. Figure 4 8 shows the mounting of CM.
Figure 4-6: Product Identi cation Label
2
Mounting
1
Relay Mounting
Din Rail
The Relay is mounted on 30 mm DIN Rail provided in the motor
starter module. Figure 4 7 shows the Relay mounting.
3
Din Clip
3
Din Rail
Figure 4-8: CM Mounting
2
Procedure:
1. Pull the DIN Clip.
2. Position the CM unit on the DIN Rail properly.
3. Push the DIN Clip to x the CM unit.
4. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the CM.
Din Clip
4
Note: Note: Mounting of Current module with increased height as
compared to height mentioned in this manual requires 30mm DIN rail
instead of 15mm DIN rail.
Figure 4-7: Relay Mounting
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
22
INSTALLATION
Display Mounting
DIO Expansion Module Mounting
The Display can be mounted in a cut-out on the front door by
using mounting clips provided. The cut out dimension required is
(W x H) : 92.5 x 45 mm. Figure 4 9 shows the Display Mounting.
The DIO Expansion Module is mounted on 30mm DIN Rail
provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4 10 shows the DIO
Expansion Module installation.
3
Panel
Frame
Din Rail
2
Display
Cutout
Din Clip
4
Figure 4-10: DIO Expansion Module Mounting
Procedure:
Mounting
Clip
1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel
is disconnected and the DIO Expansion module is free from all
power connections.
2. Pull the DIN Clip.
Figure 4-9: Display Mounting
3. Position the DIO Expansion Module on the DIN Rail properly.
4. Push the DIN Clip to x the DIO Expansion Module.
Procedure:
1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel
is disconnected and the relay is free from all power
connections.
5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the DIO
Expansion Module.
2. Place the Display at the respective attaching place on the cutout of the control plate.
3. To install the Display use the mounting clips. Place the clip on
the slot provided and push it towards the control plate. Or it
can be directly place to the end of control plate and t it by
just pressing it on Display.
4. Follow the reverse procedure the removal of the Display.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
23
INSTALLATION
Electrical Installation
This section describes about the electrical installation of the Relay
main unit, CM, Display and DIO Expansion module. Figure 4 11
shows the typical relay wiring diagram.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE
L/+
N/-
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
CONTACTOR
71 72
N/- L/+
AUX.VOLT
RESET
Y
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
B
CM UNIT
CBCT
R
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
STOP
DIGITAL INPUTS
START
82
83
81
85 CONTACTOR COIL
86
84
88
89
87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
90
PWR/COMM
S1
R
Y
S2
B
M
RTD/PTC
MOTOR STATUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
Tl1 Tl2 AO1 AO2
RS485
D+ D-
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
RST
ENT
L
Mini USB Port N
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
Figure 4-11: Typical wiring diagram
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
24
INSTALLATION
1
4
3
2
1
Tl1
Tl2
AO1
AO2
5
2
4
Pro bus
VR
VY
VB
NEU
CM Connector
Relay Main Unit Wiring
Display Port Expansion
Port
Trip
Drive Status
Alarm/Pick up COM
Reset
l/P6
l/P5
l/P4
3A
l/P3
l/P2
l/P1
3B
6
54
53
52
51
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
L/+
N/-
7 71
N/C4
COM4
N/04
N/C3
COM3
N/O3
N/C2
COM2
N/O2
N/C1
COM1
N/O1
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
72
8
Figure 4-12 (1): Overview of the Relay Main Unit
Figure 4-12 (2): Main unit
Table 4-2 lists the terminal description for Relay main unit. The
relay main unit package consists of MCOMP main unit with its
mounting din clip and terminal connectors for wire termination.
Label
Terminal Description
Possible Wire Size
1
3-Phase Reference Voltage Connector (R,Y, B, N)
2.5 sq. mm *
(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
2
Current Module Connector
Prefabricated cable
3A
Expansion Module Connector
Prefabricated cable
3B
Display/MCOMP Suite Connector
Prefabricated cable
4
Communication Port (Modbus RTU/Profibus/Modbus TCP/IP)
For Modbus 0.5 sq. mm
(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
For Profibus, TCP/IP Respective cable with standard connector
5
Temperature Input (RTD or PTC) and Analog Output Connector
0.5 sq. mm *
(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
6
Digital Input Connector
2.5 sq. mm *
(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
7
Auxiliary Supply Connector
2.5 sq. mm *
(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
8
Digital Output Connector
2.5 sq. mm *
(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
Table 4-2: Relay main unit terminal description
Note: * In case terminals 3A and 3B is present on the Relay as a combined single terminal, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a
relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
25
INSTALLATION
3 Phase Voltage Connections
3-Phase Current Connections
Connection to this particular terminal depends on the application
of the relay. Refer Application Notes for various types of
connections as per application requirement. The typical
connection for this terminal in case of 3P-4W system is shown in
Figure 4 13.
The connection to the current input port is from the CM. Figure
4 14 shows the 3-phase current cable connection.
Procedure to wire the current connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
Procedure to wire the voltage connector:
2. Check the CM cable for proper operation.
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
3. Press the notch and insert the CM cable connector in the
Relay current connector.
2. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
4. Release the notch.
3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.
4. Insert the RYBN wires (as per application requirement) in their
respective terminals.
Procedure for removal of the current connector:
5. Tighten the terminal screws.
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.
2. Press the notch and remove the CM cable connector from the
Relay current connector.
Procedure for removal of the voltage connector:
3. Release the notch.
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
R
Y
B
N
FUSE
61
Dl1
62
Dl2
63
Dl3
64
Dl4
65
Dl5
66
Dl6
67
COM
DIGITAL INPUTS
3. Detach the connector from the Relay.
NLK
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
CBCT
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
71 72
N/- L/+
AUX.VOLT
DIGITAL INPUTS
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
CM UNIT
Figure 4-13: 3 Phase Voltage Connections
Figure 4-14: 3 Phase Current Connections
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
26
INSTALLATION
Configuration Port Connection
The Relay con guration can be done in two ways by using:
1. Display
2. MCOMP Suite
Figure 4-16 shows the con guration port connection using
MCOMP Suite.
3. Press the notch and insert the Display RS485 cable connector
in the Relay con guration port.
4. Release the notch.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the Display RS485 connector cable for proper
operation.
2. Press the notch and remove the Display RS485 cable
connector from the Relay con guration port.
3. Release the notch.
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
DIGITAL INPUTS
61 Dl1
67 COM
Figure 4-15: Con guration Port Connection
RS485
CONVERTER
Figure 4-16: Con guration Port connection using MCOMP suite
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
27
INSTALLATION
RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections
Communication Port Connection
Positive Temperature Coef cient (PTC) or RTD input is directly
connected to this port. PT100 is used as a temperature sensing
unit. The output of PT100 will act as RTD input in the Relay and
the temperature range can be measured between 0 to 180 °C.
RS485 and RJ45 are available for communication. These ports are
used to communicate with the upper level systems such as
EWS/DCS/SCADA on either Modbus RTU / Profibus / Modbus
TCP/IP protocol. Figure 4 18 to Figure 4 26 show the
communication connection with looping diagrams.
RTD or PTC inputs in the Relay are dependent on the ordering
code. For RTD/PTC input, the wire should get connected at
terminal 53/TI2 and 54/TI1. If no RTD/PTC is connected, the
RTD/PTC Alarm and Trip setting must be disabled.
RS485 Port Connection for MODBUS RTU
The analog output ranges from 4-20 mA. It can be mapped to any
of the parameters like 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current,
Frequency, Power, etc,. This output is given to an analog meter
like LCS meter (4 20 mA), DCS for monitoring, etc,. For analog
output the wire should get connected at terminals 52/AO1 (+ve)
and 51/AO2 (-ve). Figure 4 17 shows the cable connections.
Relay
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the RTD/PTC/Analog connector cable for proper
operation.
RS485 MODBUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2
D+ D+ D- D41 42 43 44
MODBUS RS485
LOOPING
3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.
4. Insert the cables in their respective terminals.
Figure 4-18: Modbus RS485 connection
5. Tighten the terminal screws.
6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.
RS485 Port Connection for PROFIBUS
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Detach the connector from the Relay.
Relay
RS485 PROFIBUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2
PROFIBUS RS485
LOOPING
Figure 4-19: Pro bus RS485 port connection
Relay
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2
RS485
D+ D-
MODBUS RS485
LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure 4-17: Temperature and Analog output connections
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
28
INSTALLATION
D+
EWS
SCADA
DCS
D-
EWS / SCADA / DCS
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D44 D-
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
Relay
43 D44 D-
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D44 D-
D+
Relay
Relay
D-
Figure 4-20: Modbus/Pro bus looping connections
RJ45 Port Connection for MODBUS TCP/IP
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the communication cable for proper operation.
3. Press the notch and insert the communication cable in the
Relay communication port.
4. Release the notch.
Relay
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Press the notch and remove the cable from the Relay
communication port.
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2
RJ45 PORT
RJ45 MODBUS
TCP/IP PORT
3. Release the notch.
Figure 4-21: Modbus TCP/IP RJ 45 port connection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
29
INSTALLATION
Auxiliary Power Supply Connection
Digital Input Connections
Auxiliary power supply is required to power up the Relay.
Universal power supply ranging from 80 to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V
DC is used as an auxiliary supply. Figure 4 22 shows auxiliary
supply connection.
The Relay main unit has six DIs and one common terminal
through which it senses the status of the motor and commands;
and works accordingly. Six isolated digital inputs sense the
voltage ranging from 60 V to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC and is
dependent on the selected voltage sensing range during ordering
of the relay. The six contact inputs can be programmed to any of
the input functions such as Stop, Start, Interlock, Reset, etc,.
Procedure to wire the auxiliary supply connector:
1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
3. Insert the supply wires in their respective terminals. Make sure
the power supply rating of the Relay before inserting the
supply wires into it.
Note: For proper sensing of Digital Inputs, the common terminal must
be connected to neutral in case of AC, and to negative (-ve) in case
of DC.
Figure 4 23 shows digital input connection.
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
5. Anchor the auxiliary supply connector by using two
connector screws.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all the possible power
connections.
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
5. Anchor the DI connector cable by using two connector
screws.
3. Remove the auxiliary supply connector from the Relay.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
N/-
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Remove the DI connector cable from the Relay.
L/+
1
3
4
71
Y
R
N/- L/+
72
3-PH.VOLTAGE
AUX.VOLT
N/-
L/+
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
DIGITAL INPUTS
61 Dl1
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
DIGITAL INPUTS
2
N B
67 COM
67 COM
Figure 4-22: Auxiliary Supply connection
Figure 4-23: Digital Input connections
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
30
INSTALLATION
Digital Output Connections
Current Module (CM) Wiring
The Relay main unit has four change-over potential free output
contacts. These DOs have the current carrying capacity of 10 A on
240 V AC. Each change-over contact has following terminals:
Figure 4-25 shows overview of the Current Module Unit.
N/O (Normally Open) - It is normally not connected to the
common of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the
corresponding N/O contact is shorted to the common of that DO.
Table 4-3 lists the terminal description for Current module unit.
The current module unit package consists of MCOMP current
module unit with its mounting din clip and prefabricated FRC
cable for connection with Relay main unit. The length of the cable
is dependent on the ordered part number.
N/C (Normally Closed) - It is normally connected to the common
of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the
corresponding N/C contact becomes open to the common of the
corresponding DO.
COM - It is the common terminal available to which NO and NC
terminals are connected alternately according to the activation of
the corresponding output.
These outputs can be programmed to any of the output functions
like alarm, trip, etc,. Figure 4 24 shows digital output connection.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.
Figure 4-25: Current Module unit overview
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
5. Anchor the DO connector by using two connector screws.
Label
Procedure for removal of the connector:
(R,Y,B)
1. Make sure that the Relay is free from all the power
connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
Terminal
Description
Possible Wire Size/Diameter
3-Phase Current
Pass through Hole
CM 1 pass through dia.: 4.5 mm
0.5 sq. mm*
1
CBCT Input
Connector
2
Current Module
Connector
3. Detach the DO connector from the Relay.
R
Y
B
N
CM 2-5 pass through dia.: 16 mm
(Screw Thread = M2,
Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
Prefabricated cable
Table 4-3: Current Module terminal description
Note: * In case separate terminal for CBCT connection is not available
on CM unit, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a
relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.
CONTACTOR
Y
B
CM UNIT
CBCT
R
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
SFU / MCCB
82
83
81
85 CONTACTOR COIL
86
84
88
89
87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
90
L/+
N/-
L/+
N/-
S1
R
Y
S2
B
M
Figure 4-24: Digital Output connections
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
31
INSTALLATION
The Relay is provided with its own CM. CM is available in 5 types.
CM has pass through arrangement, through which the motor
supply wires (R, Y and B) enters (all three wires should enter
from same side) in to the CM before connecting to the motor.
The connecting wire from CM to the Relay is of two types
based on its length (0.5 m and 1 m).
In case of sensitive earth fault, CBCT is used. The 3-phase
supply to the motor passes through CBCT which senses the
earth fault current under abnormal conditions. This is used as
an input by the Relay to measure earth fault current. Figure
4 26 shows CM wiring.
In case where external conventional CTs are required to sense
the current if the motor IFLC is greater than 80 A, the
connection will be as shown in Figure 4 27. Based on the
secondary of external CT, MCOMP current module is selected
for the required application.
R
Y
B
N
Y
CM UNIT
B
CBCT
R
S1
S2
R
Y
B
M
Figure 4-26: Current Module connections
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
32
INSTALLATION
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE
L/+
N/-
6
2
4
6
1
3
5
1
3
5
CONTACTOR A
START1
START2
CONTACTOR B
STOP
RESET
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
71 72
N/- L/+
3-PH.VOLTAGE
AUX.VOLT
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
4
DIGITAL INPUTS
2
EXTERNAL CT
B
Y
82
83
81
85 CONTACTOR COIL
86
84
88
89
87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
90
PWR/COMM
R
CM UNIT
CBCT
MOTOR STATUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
Tl1 Tl2 AO1 AO2
ALARM/PICKUP
RS485
D+ D-
TRIP
S1
R
ENT
L
Mini USB Port N
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
S2
B
Y
RST
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
M
RTD/PTC
Figure 4-27: External Conventional CT connections
Note: Ensure that all cables (RYB) enter from single side. The Relay auto detects the CM type. Ensure power recycle of the Relay after proper connection
with the CM.
Display Wiring
The OLED Display is an optional unit provided with the Relay to
display metering, protection and drive speci c parameters. Figure
4 28 shows the Display front and bottom view. The Display unit
package consists of MCOMP
PWR/COMM
L/+
MOTOR STATUS
D-
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
N/+
Mini USB Port
RST
ENT
L
N
D+
Figure 4-28: Display front and bottom view
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
33
INSTALLATION
Display unit along with its 4 mounting clips and Display-cable for
connecting to relay main unit. The length of the Display-cable is
dependent on the ordered part number.
1. Con guration Port connection.
3. Front USB Port Connection.
The OLED Display is provided with a USB port in the front. It
enables local con guration through computer/laptop using
MCOMP Suite. Mini USB cable is required for the connection.
Figure 4 31 shows the Display front port connection.
Con guration port (RJ-11) is provided to communicate with the
Relay. Figure 4 29 shows the con guration port available at
bottom side of the Display. A prefabricated cable comes along
with the display to connect to the relay main unit.
L/+
N/+
D-
D+
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
Figure 4-29: Display con guration port connections
Mini USB Port
RST
ENT
L
N
Figure 4-31: Display front USB port connection
Note: * In case RJ11 port is not available on display unit, refer MCOMP
manual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay.
2. Auxiliary Supply Connection.
An auxiliary supply is needed to power up the Display, which will
get connected to the port provided at the bottom side of the
Display. Figure 4 30 shows the Display auxiliary supply
connection. Possible wire size for termination is 0.5 sq. mm.
Auxiliary Supply
L/+
N/+
D-
D+
Figure 4-30: Display auxiliary supply connection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
34
INSTALLATION
Expansion Unit Wiring
The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit used along
with MCOMP main unit for increasing the count of Digital/Analog
input and digital output as per application requirement. The
expansion unit comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4
digital inputs & 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital
inputs & 2 analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs.
The expansion unit package consists of MCOMP expansion unit
with its mounting din clip and expansion-cable of 0.4 meter for
connecting to relay main unit. Refer Digital input and Digital
output wiring sections in Main unit wiring for expansion DIO
wiring connections.
Maximum number of 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI units allowed
to be connected to main unit is 1. 5DI/2AI unit and
3DI/2DO/2AI unit cannot be connected together to main unit.
Table 4-5 shows all possible combination of expansion units
which can be successfully connected together to the main unit.
Maximum three expansion modules can be connected to a single
relay main unit provided:
Figure 4-32 shows MCOMP main unit and expansion unit
connection representation:
If 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI unit is connected along with
4DI/2DO or 8DI expansion unit then it should be connected as
last unit in the series.
Table 4-4 lists the terminal description for various types of
Expansion module units.
Maximum number of 4DI/2DO units allowed to be connected
to main unit is 2.
Expansion Module Type
Label, Terminal Description and possible wire size
DI1-DI8:
Field input connection points
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
COM
COM
DO1(1-2),DO2(3-4):
N/O Digital output connection points
1234
Dip switches
T
AI1+/-, AI2+/-:
Analog inputs connection points
1
2
3
DO1
COM:
4
DO2
4DI/2DO Module
Wire neutral in case of AC digital inputs, -ve supply in
case of DC digital inputs
T:
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
COM
1,2,3,4 Dip switches:
1234
Select module ID for expansion module as per
Dip switches
T
Test push button
configuration done in relay main unit
When 1000 => module id 1
Dl7
COM
COM
Dl8
When 0100 => module id 2
8Dl Module
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
COM
Al1+
Al1-
Al2+
Al2-
1234
Possible wire size for all termination points: 2.5 sq. mm.
Dip switches
T
When 1100 => module id 3
(Screw Thread = M3, Tightening torque = 0.45-0.5 Nm)
Dl4
COM
COM
Dl5
5Dl/2Al Module
Table 4-4: Expansion Module terminal description
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
35
INSTALLATION
54
53
52
51
Tl1
Tl2
AO1
AO2
CM Connector
4
3
2
1
Pro bus
VR
VY
VB
NEU
Trip
Drive Status
Alarm/Pick up COM
l/P6
l/P5
l/P4
l/P3
l/P2
l/P1
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
Display Port Expansion
Port
Reset
L/+
N/-
72
71
N/C4
COM4
N/04
N/C3
COM3
N/O3
N/C2
COM2
N/O2
N/C1
COM1
N/O1
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
Expansion unit 1
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
Expansion unit 2
COM
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
1234
Dl7
COM
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
COM
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
1234
Dip switches
T
Expansion unit 3
COM
Dl8
Dl7
COM
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
COM
1234
Dip switches
T
COM
Dl8
8Dl Module
Dip switches
T
Dl7
COM
COM
Dl8
8Dl Module
8Dl Module
Relay main unit
Figure 4-32: Main unit and expansion unit connection
Single unit Combination
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 2
Expansion unit 3
1
4DI/2DO
X
X
2
8DI
X
X
3
5DI/2AI
X
X
4
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
X
Expansion unit 2
Expansion unit 3
Two unit Combination
Expansion unit 1
1
4DI/2DO
8DI
X
2
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
X
3
4DI/2DO
5DI/2AI
X
4
4DI/2DO
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
5
8DI
8DI
X
6
8DI
5DI/2AI
X
7
8DI
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
Three unit Combination
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 2
Expansion unit 3
1
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
2
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
3
8DI
8DI
8DI
4
8DI
8DI
5DI/2AI
5
8DI
8DI
3DI/2DO/2AI
6
8DI
4DI/2DO
5DI/2AI
7
8DI
4DI/2DO
3DI/2DO/2AI
Table 4-5: Expansion unit connection combinations
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
36
METERING AND
MONITORING
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
37
METERING AND MONITORING
Overview
Average of True RMS Current
This chapter describes the various parameters available in the
Relay for metering and monitoring. The Relay measures real-time
values of Current, Voltage, Power, Analog Output, Temperature
and monitors motor speci c data like number of starts, stops,
running hours, etc,.
The average current is calculated using formula:
All values measured by the Relay can be accessed using following
interfaces:
Display
MCOMP Suite
Iavg = (Ir + Iy + Ib)/3
Thermal Capacity
The Thermal Capacity is the tolerable capacity that the motor can
withstand under overload condition. It is calculated internally by
the Relay as per IEC 60255 curve. To calculate the Thermal
Capacity, the Relay uses the IFLC of the Motor, instantaneous
running current and trip class of the Motor.
Communication Port
Current Unbalance
Metering
Current Based Metering
True RMS Line Current
Current unbalance is calculated in percentage as explained in
Protection Chapter under Current Unbalance Protection. It is
instantaneously available for monitoring in MCOMP suite &
Display monitoring window.
The Relay measures RMS values of line currents (Ir, Iy and Ib)
through CM.
Ir: Current owing through R phase
Iy: Current owing through Y phase
Ib: Current owing through B phase
Voltage Based Metering
True RMS Line Voltage
The Relay measures the RMS value of the line voltage (Vry, Vyb
and Vbr).
Vry: Voltage of R phase with respect to Y phase
Earth Fault Current
Earth Fault Current is an unbalanced current which can be
represented by vector summation. In case of 3-phase system,
under healthy conditions, Earth Fault current will be zero. It is
present only when Earth Fault occurs. The Relay measures the
Earth Fault current in following ways.
Vyb: Voltage of Y phase with respect to B phase
Vbr: Voltage of B phase with respect to R phase
True RMS Phase Voltage
The Relay measures phase to neutral voltages (Vr, Vy and Vb).
Vector Summation
Earth Fault Current is equal to the vector sum of three line current
values. It is calculated using formula:
Vr: Voltage of R phase with respect to neutral
Vy: Voltage of Y phase with respect to neutral
Vb: Voltage of B phase with respect to neutral
Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib
Where Ie is Earth Fault Current.
Average of True RMS Voltage
Average RMS voltage is calculated using formula:
CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)
CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault
conditions. The 3-phase supply to the motor passes through
CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal
conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to
measure Earth Fault current.
Vavg = (Vr + Vy + Vb)/3
Frequency
Relay measures the frequency of the 3-phase voltage supplied to
the Motor.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
38
METERING AND MONITORING
Power and Energy Based Metering
Power Factor
Power
Power Factor is the cosine of the angle between the phase
currents and phase voltages. It can also be represented as the
absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power.
Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power are based on the following
factors:
Power Factor is calculated using formula:
3-phase RMS phase voltage Vr, Vy, Vb
Power Factor = Active Power / Apparent Power
3-phase RMS line current Ir, Iy, Ib
Power factor (cos φ)
Active power is also known as real power which gives the RMS
value of power. It is calculated using formula:
Active Power (kW) = Vr x Ir x cos φ x Vy x Iy x cos φ + Vb x Ib x cos φ
Miscellaneous Parameter
Temperature
Relay measures the temperature of the Motor by using RTD or
PTC inputs. RTD measures temperature in terms of degree
Celsius, PTC measures temperature in terms of ohmic value.
Reactive Power is calculated using formula:
Reactive Power (kVAR) = Vr x Ir x sin φ x Vy x Iy x sin φ + Vb x Ib x sin
φ
Digital Input/Output Status
Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of Digital
Input/Output.
Apparent Power is calculated using formula:
Apparent Power (kVA) =
(Total Active Power)² + (Total Reactive Power)²
COMPlogic output Status
Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of
COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counters etc)
Energy
The energy consumed by the load can be calculated using
formula:
Active Energy (kWh) = Total Active Power X Number of Hours Run
Monitoring
Motor Speci c Data Monitoring
Reactive Energy (kVARh) = Total Reactive Power x Number of Hours
Run
Phase Sequence
Apparent Energy (kVAh) = Total Apparent Power x Number of Hours
Run
Relay detects the phase sequence (Voltage Phase Sequence) of
the 3-phase motor.
Motor Starting Time
Relay measures the actual time taken by the Motor to start. The
motor starting time is measured as time taken by average current
to rise from 0 A to a value above IFLC and drop back below IFLC
value. Figure 5 2 illustrates the starting curve of the motor.
j(lm) S
S
O
O
Figure 5-1: Power Factor
P
Re S
Current (RMS)
Q
Motor
Curve
IFLC
Ir
Pre Start
Starting Time Running
Figure 5-2: Starting curve of the motor
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
39
METERING AND MONITORING
CM Type
Total Motor Run Hours
Relay auto detects the type of CM connected to the Main Unit.
Relay measures the total number of hours the motor has run from
the time the Relay settings have been restored.
Number of Starts
Relay measures the total number of times the motor has started
from the time factory settings of the Relay has been stored.
Starting Peak Current
It is the maximum current drawn by the motor during the starting
time as shown in Figure 5 2.
Number of Stops
Relay measures the total number of times the motor has stopped
from the time factory settings of the Relay has been restored.
Annunciations
Relay indicates healthy/unhealthy status of the motor such as
Ready to start, Run, Trip, Alarm and Inhibit conditions using
annunciation LEDs.
Motor Run Hours
Relay measures the number of hours the motor has run from the
time it has last been started.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
40
PROTECTIONS
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
41
PROTECTIONS
Overview
This section provides a detailed description about the various
faults possible in the motor; their causes and the preventive
measures taken by the Relay to protect the motor. Alarm is an
indication which requires immediate attention. It indicates a need
for corrective action to prevent fault occurrence. It may result into
serious implications if not noticed. The alarm-related parameters
can be con gured for most of the protection functions.
The Relay responds to an Alarm in following ways:
Pickup Set: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that
triggers Pickup of a protection function. Pickup set is calculated
using formula:
Pickup Set = Pickup Set in % of corresponding parameter
= (Pickup Set in %) X (Parameter Value)/100
Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding
parameter is IFLC. If IFLC value is 10 A, then the corresponding
parameter value will be 10 A, for Pickup Set of 150 %:
Pickup Set Value (IOC) = (150 x 10) / 100 = 15 A
The alarm gets activated upon the occurrence of any fault.
The cause and time for the Alarm/Pickup will be recorded.
Alarm/Pickup LED glows Amber.
The Relay counts and records the number of Alarm/Pickup
conditions.
The Relay responds to a fault in following ways:
On the Relay, trip LED glows Red.
On the Relay, motor status LED glows Amber.
Alarm Set: A limit in % for the monitored parameter that triggers
a protection function alarm. Alarm Set value is calculated using
formula:
Alarm Set = Alarm Set in % of corresponding parameter
= (Alarm Set in %) X (Pickup Set)/100
Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding
parameter is IOC (Pickup Set). If IOC value is 15 A, then the
corresponding parameter value will be 15 A and for Alarm set of
90 %:
Alarm Set value = (90 x 15) / 100 = 13.5
DO of the Relay used for starter will go LOW.
DO of the Relay used for tripping will go HIGH.
The Relay stores the data for the cause of fault along with the
parameters such as time of fault, source of fault and
corresponding values of Current, Voltage, Earth Current,
Temperature, Power Factor and Frequency. The Relay keeps a
count for the number of faults occurred and stores ve events &
ve trip records which can be viewed by the user at any point of
time.
The Relay clears the alarm/pickup whenever the measured value
drops below the Alarm/Pickup Reset threshold.
Figure 6 1 describes a typical motor protection function. This
diagram is expressed in terms of a measuring parameter.
Hysteresis band: This setting de nes the reset value for the
alarm and pickup set values for respective protection. Hysteresis
setting is categorized into three settings as current, voltage and
frequency to provide alarm/pickup reset values for all current
based, voltage based and frequency based protections
respectively.
Parameter
Setting Range
Step Increase Factory Setting
Current
3 15 %
1%
3%
Voltage
3 15 %
1%
3%
Frequency
1 15 %
1%
3%
Table 4-6: Hysteresis setting
Measuring parameter (X)
X>=XP
Trip Delay
Trip
X>=Xa
Instantaneous
Alarm
Pickup Reset: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that
resets (removes) the Pickup condition when the corresponding
monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else the Pickup
condition persists. Pickup Reset is calculated using formula:
Pickup Reset = (Pickup Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100
Example: If pickup set value is 15 A for locked rotor protection,
and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:
Pickup Reset Value = (15)*(100 - 5) / 100 = 14.25 A
Figure 6-1: Motor Protection Function
Where,
X: Measuring Parameter
Xa: Alarm threshold value
Xp: Trip set value
Alarm Reset: A limit that resets the alarm condition when the
corresponding monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else
the alarm condition persists. Alarm Reset value is calculated using
formula:
Alarm Reset = (Alarm Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
42
PROTECTIONS
Example: If alarm set value is 15 A for under current protection,
and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:
Alarm Reset Value = (15)*(100 + 5) / 100 = 15.75 A
Note: Factory default setting is class 10 for Overload protection.
Reset modes: Reset mode allows the user to select a desirable
mode to reset the trip condition. The available modes are:
Trip Delay: A time limit after which the Relay issues Trip
command from the time of Pickup, if condition persists.
Trip Curve Characteristic (TCC): The Relay includes a de nite
trip characteristic for all protection functions as shown in Figure
6 2, (except the Thermal Overload function, as it has inverse trip
curve characteristic shown in Figure 6 3).
De nite TCC: The duration of the fault delay remains constant
irrespective of the changes in the value of the measured quantity
(current), as described in the Figure 6 2.
Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with
the value of the measured quantity. The possibility of damage
increases along with the measured quantity and thus the time
delay decreases.
Local: Reset from MCOMP Suite or Display
Remote: Reset through Digital Input
Communication: Reset through Modbus RTU, Pro bus or
Modbus TCP/IP
Auto: Automatically reset once fault is cleared
Different reset modes can be independently selected for each
protection.
Note: Auto Reset is available only for Thermal Overload and under
voltage Protections.
Protection function is classi ed on the basis of following
parameters.
Thermal
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Miscellaneous
XP
Motor Tripped
Thermal Protection
The fundamental protective function of the Relay is Thermal
Protection. Thermal Capacity of the motor is the tolerable
capacity that the motor can withstand under overload condition.
In normal condition, the motor temperature will eventually
stabilize at some steady state temperature (within the limit) due
to ow of steady current. Under transient and overload
conditions the Thermal Capacity of the motor rises, but within the
corresponding limits. When the overload persists for a
considerable amount of time, the motor temperature and thermal
capacity will rise. A trip occurs when the thermal capacity used by
the motor reaches its 100 %.The Thermal Capacity of motor is
calculated by measuring the power circuit currents.
Trip Delay
Measuring parameter (X)
Figure 6-2: De nite TCC
1*104
Time In Seconds
1000
Majority of the motor failures are due to overheating. There are
many reasons for increase in the temperature and Thermal
Capacity of the motor. Fault occurs mainly due to overload,
operation on unbalanced condition, poor ventilation, single
phasing, short circuits, Earth Fault etc,.
100
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
10
Class 5
1
0
1
2
Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC
3
4
5
MFLA
6
7
8
9
Overheating of the motor damages the windings hence decrease
the ef ciency and life of the motor.
Overload (49)
Overload is a condition where current higher than the rated value
ows to the motor resulting in excessive heating of the motor.
Rapid motor heating occurs during the overload, acceleration
time, and stall condition. The Relay gives the Overload Protection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
43
PROTECTIONS
based on calculated Thermal Memory (TM) and gives Trip
command when thermal capacity reaches its 100 %.The overload
curve controls the rate of increase of the thermal capacity used
whenever the equivalent motor heating current is greater than
current set point. The Thermal Memory is directly proportional to
ISET value, which is the overload current setting.
The Relay thermal model follows IEC 60255 standard model. Trip
time is calculated using formula:
I 2
Ir
I 2
Ir
x ln
tp =
The Relay detects Overload condition and gives:
An alarm when Thermal Memory reaches above the Alarm Set
value.
Trip when Thermal Memory reaches 100%.
Ip 2
Ir
(k)
2
Where,
tp: Trip time
Ir : Rated current (ISET)
Pause Time Delay: Pause Time Delay is a con gurable time after
which the thermal memory will be reset to zero when the Relay
trips due to Overload Protection. It is effective only when pause
time setting is enabled.
τ: Time constant
k: Asymptotic Constant of value 1.15
Ip: Current just before the overload current
I: Actual running current
Thermal Memory Reset Value: It is the value of Thermal
Memory at which the trip condition due to overload is reset when
the Thermal Memory falls below the Thermal Memory Reset
Value. This setting is effective only when auto reset functionality
in case of thermal overload is enabled.
1000
Time In Seconds
Thermal Inhibit Setting: It is the setting for which the Relay will
continue to be in inhibit mode if Thermal Memory does not falls
below set Thermal inhibit setting value. In inhibit mode, the relay
will not detect any auto-start from current or will not allow to the
start the motor in case start command is given. This setting is
available for editing only through Admin mode of MCOMP suite.
1*104
100
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
10
Alarm Response for this protection can be separately enabled or
disabled.
Class 5
1
Table 6-1 lists the overload protection settings available in the
Relay.
0
1
2
3
4
5
MFLA
6
7
8
9
Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC
Parameter
ISET
Setting Range
20
Factory Setting
5 % of IFLC
100 % of IFLC
100 % of IFLC
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Step Increase
95
As per Hysteresis band
80
100 % of TM
Alarm Reset
5 % of TM
95%
As per Hysteresis band
Thermal Memory Reset Value
5
30 %
5%
20 %
Thermal Inhibit Setting
30
95 %
1%
33 %
Alarm
Enable or Disable
Enable
Pause Setting
On or Off
Off
Pause Time Delay
Reset Modes
1
1200 sec
1 sec
Local, Remote, Communication, Auto
Local
Table 6-1: Overload Protection Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
44
PROTECTIONS
The tripping time depends on the trip class set in the Relay (class 5
to class 40), which de nes time duration the Relay will take to
trip, as shown in Figure 6 3, and numerically represented by
Table 6 2.
Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)
Multiple
of ISET
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
1.151
851.68
1703.54
2555.4
3407.26
4259.12
5110.98
5962.84
6814.7
1.2
335.82
671.68
1007.56
1343.44
1679.32
2015.2
2351.08
2686.96
1.25
251.04
502.14
753.24
1007.34
1255.42
1506.52
1757.62
2008.72
1.3
204.46
408.96
613.46
817.96
1022.46
1226.96
1431.46
1635.96
1.4
150.52
301.04
451.58
602.12
752.66
903.2
1053.74
1204.28
1.5
118.76
237.54
356.32
475.1
593.88
712.64
831.42
950.2
1.6
97.42
194.84
292.28
389.7
487.14
584.56
682
779.42
1.7
81.98
163.98
245.98
327.98
409.98
491.98
573.98
655.95
1.8
70.3
140.6
210.92
281.22
351.52
421.84
492.14
562.44
1.9
61.14
122.3
183.46
244.6
305.76
366.9
428.06
489.2
2.0
53.8
107.6
161.4
215.2
269
322.8
376.6
430.42
2.25
40.58
81.16
121.74
162.32
202.9
243.48
284.08
324.66
2.5
31.86
63.74
95.5
127.46
159.34
191.2
223.06
254.94
2.75
25.76
51.54
77.3
103.06
128.82
154.58
180.36
206.12
3.0
21.3
42.6
63.92
85.22
106.52
127.82
149.12
170.42
3.25
17.94
35.86
53.8
71.72
89.66
107.58
125.5
143.44
3.5
15.32
30.64
45.94
61.62
76.56
91.88
107.2
122.5
3.75
13.24
26.48
39.72
52.96
66.2
79.44
92.68
105.9
4.0
11.58
23.14
34.7
46.26
57.82
69.38
80.96
92.52
4.25
10.2
20.4
30.58
40.78
50.96
61.16
71.34
81.54
4.5
9.06
18.12
27.16
36.22
45.26
54.32
63.38
72.42
4.75
8.1
16.2
24.3
32.4
40.48
48.58
56.68
64.78
5.0
7.3
14.58
21.86
29.14
36.44
43.72
51
58.28
5.25
6.6
13.18
19.78
26.38
32.96
39.56
46.14
52.74
5.5
6
12
17.98
23.98
29.96
35.92
41.96
47.94
5.75
5.48
10.96
16.42
21.9
27.36
32.84
38.3
43.78
6.0
5.02
10.04
15.06
20.08
25.1
30.1
35.12
40.14
6.25
4.62
9.24
13.86
18.48
23.1
27.7
32.32
36.94
6.5
4.28
8.54
12.8
17.06
21.32
25.58
29.84
34.1
6.75
3.96
7.9
11.86
15.8
19.74
23.7
27.64
31.6
7.0
3.68
7.34
11.02
14.68
18.34
22.02
25.68
29.34
7.25
3.42
6.84
10.26
13.68
17.08
20.5
23.92
27.34
7.5
3.2
6.38
9.58
12.76
15.96
19.14
22.34
25.52
7.75
3
5.98
8.96
11.94
14.94
17.92
20.9
23.88
Table 6-2 (1): Trip Delay as per Trip Class
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
45
PROTECTIONS
Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)
Multiple
of ISET
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
8.0
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
14
16.8
19.6
22.4
8.25
2.64
5.26
7.9
10.52
13.16
15.78
18.42
21.04
8.5
2.48
4.96
7.44
9.92
12.38
14.86
17.34
19.82
8.75
2.34
4.68
7.02
9.36
11.68
14.02
16.36
18.7
9.0
2.22
4.42
6.62
8.84
11.04
13.24
15.46
17.66
9.25
2.1
4.18
6.28
8.36
10.44
12.54
14.62
16.72
9.5
1.98
3.96
5.94
7.92
9.9
11.88
13.86
15.84
9.75
1.88
3.76
5.64
7.52
9.4
11.28
13.16
15.04
10.0
1.8
3.58
5.36
7.14
8.94
10.72
12.5
14.28
10.25
1.7
3.4
5.1
6.8
8.5
10.2
11.9
13.6
Table 6-2 (2): Trip Delay as per Trip Class
Note: Thermal Overload protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled in case of motor feeder.
At any given time while motor is in running condition, if Thermal Memory reaches 100 %, the relay issues a trip command.
Current Based Protection
Parameter
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Setting range
Over current Protection (50P)
Over current fault is a condition where the current through the
conductor (power circuit) exceeds its preset value. This fault is
usually caused due to short circuit, load increase, improper
connection, or ground fault.
Trip
Enable or Disable
Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
Local
Table 6-3 (2): Overcurrent Protection Settings
The Relay detects Overcurrent condition and gives:
An alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above
the Alarm Set value.
Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
Table 6 3 lists the Over current Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Note: At Starting time of the motor Overcurrent is disabled.
Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con gured
through MCOMP suite or Display
Parameter
Pickup Set
Setting range
50
1000 % of IFLC
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
50%
As per hysteresis band
95
Alarm Set
90% of pickup set
90%
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
85
Alarm
0.1 to 10 sec
Enable or Disable
0.1 sec
Under current fault is a condition where the current through the
conductor (power circuit) reaches below its rated minimum value.
Under current condition is observed mainly during No-load. Table
6 4 lists the Undercurrent Protection settings available in the
Relay.
The Relay detects Undercurrent condition and gives:
An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases goes below the
Alarm set value.
Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches below the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
100%
Pickup Reset
Trip Delay
Under current Protection (37)
0.1 sec
Disable
Table 6-3 (1): Overcurrent Protection Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
46
PROTECTIONS
Parameter
Setting range
Pickup Set
30
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
85 % of IR
5%
50%
Parameter
As per hysteresis band
110% of pickup set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
110%
1 sec
Pickup Set
10 sec
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Alarm
Enable or Disable
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
Local
Table 6-4: Undercurrent Protection Settings
Note: Undercurrent protection is disabled for the set starting time in the
Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Undercurrent can be separately
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display. Under current Protection
will be inactive for current less than 10 % of the set full load current.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Setting range
50
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
1 to 120 sec
Table 6 6 lists the Earth Fault Protection settings available in the
Relay.
100 %
5%
50%
As per hysteresis band
85-100% of pickup set
Trip Delay
90%
5%
As per hysteresis band
1 to 30 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
Local
Table 6-5: Current Unbalance Protection Settings
Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Current Unbalance can be
separately con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Current unbalance Protection (46)
Current unbalance is a condition where the current in the 3Phases differs in magnitude. Current unbalance is usually caused
due to load unbalance or improper motor windings. Large motors
can sustain minor current unbalance in the circuit, but small
motors cannot.
Current unbalance in the 3-phase circuits induces negative
sequence current, which generates negative torque causing the
motor to heat up. Negative sequence current affects the rotor by
increasing the copper losses and overheating. Current unbalance
also causes pulsating magnetic eld in the stator which results in
uneven force at the bearings thereby damaging the motor. Hence
it decreases the ef ciency and life of the motor. Table 6 5 lists the
Current unbalance Protection settings available in the Relay.
The Relay detects Current unbalance condition and gives:
Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)
Earth current calculation is done in two ways in the Relay.
1. Vector Summation
Earth Fault current is equal to the vector sum of the three line
current values. It is calculated using formula:
Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib
Where,
Ie : Earth Fault current
Ir : Current owing through R phase
Iy: Current owing through Y phase
An Alarm when unbalance of 3-phase currents goes above the
Alarm set value.
Ib: Current owing through B phase
Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase current reaches above the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
2. CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)
Current unbalance is calculated using formula:
1. When Imax > 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if
(Imax Imin) / Imax > Unbalance Set Value
2. When Imax < 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if
(Imax Imin) / IFLC > Unbalance Set Value
Where,
Imax: Maximum current of the 3-phases current
Imin: Minimum current of the 3-phases current
IFLC: Full load current
CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault
conditions. The 3-phases supply to the motor passes through the
CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal
conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to
measure Earth Fault current. It is recommended to use
Manufacturer's supplied specially designed CBCT of ratio 2000:1
for MCOMP relay.
The Relay detects the Earth Fault condition and gives:
An alarm when earth current reaches above the Alarm Set
value.
Pickup when earth current reaches above the pickup value and
if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
47
PROTECTIONS
Parameter
Setting range
Earth Fault
Type
Vector Sum or CBCT
Pickup Set
(VS)
Pickup Reset
(VS)
Alarm Set
(VS)
Alarm Reset
(VS)
Trip Delay
(VS)
Pickup Set
(CBCT)
Pickup Reset
(CBCT)
Alarm Set
(CBCT)
Alarm Reset
(CBCT)
20
500 % of IFLC
Vector
Sum
In Locked Rotor condition, the rotor gets locked due to presence
of the excessive load. As a result, the motor draws higher current
to drive the excessive load. The high current ow in the motor
heats up the rotor quickly due to skin effect.
25 %
The Relay detects jamming of the motor after starting time and
gives:
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
5%
An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above
the Alarm Set value.
As per Hysteresis band
90 % of IEF
90 %
As per Hysteresis band
0.1
0.1
60 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
20 A
0.1
1A
Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
Table 6 7 lists the Locked Rotor Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Parameter
As per Hysteresis Band
0.1
pickup set
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
0.1
Alarm Set
As per Hysteresis Band
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Run (CBCT)
0
60 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
Trip Delay
Start (CBCT)
0
25 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
Alarm Delay
Start (CBCT)
0
60 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Alarm Delay
Run (CBCT)
0
60 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
Enable
Reset Mode
Local, Remote, Communication
Local
Table 6-6: Earth Fault Protection Settings
Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Earth Fault can be separately
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
In case of Vector Summation (VS), settings will be in % of IFLC and in
case of CBCT, settings will be in absolute amperes.
Locked Rotor Protection (50LR)
Locked rotor condition can arise during motor starting time or in
motor running condition. Stalling in starting time is taken care by
separate Excessive start time protection. Load jam in motor
running condition is taken care by Locked rotor (50LR) protection
available in the Relay.
Locked Rotor current: The current drawn by the motor, when the
rotor is locked under full voltage condition. Rotor stalling is mainly
due to improper connection between the shaft and rotor, over
load etc,.
Trip Delay
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Setting range
150
1000 % of IFLC
50%
400%
As per hysteresis band
90% of pickup set
90%
As per hysteresis band
0.5 to 30 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
Local
Table 6-7: Locked Rotor Protection Settings
Note: Locked rotor protection is disabled for the set starting time in the
Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Locked Rotor can be separately
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display
IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)
This protection functions when the AC input current exceeds a
predetermined value, and in which the input current & operating
time are inversely related to a substantial portion of the
performance range. The time to trip is derived from standard
Time Inverse Curves. Two stages of IDMT over current settings are
available, which can be enabled individually or all at once,
depending on the requirement. Available Curve types are IEC
curves as: Inverse, Very Inverse and Extremely Inverse.
Note: The working function remains the same for IDMT Phase Over
current Stage 1, IDMT Phase Over current Stage 2, IDMT Neutral Over
current Stage 1, IDMT Neutral Over current Stage 2.
Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con gured
through MCOMP suite or Display.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
48
PROTECTIONS
Table 6-8 enlists constant values for IEC curves for dependent
time operating characteristics.
t = TMS
[(
]
k
a
I
I Pickup
)
Phase Loss is usually due to internal causes like improper
connections in the circuit, blowing of one of the fuses, failure in
switch gear contacts and external causes like line breakages, etc,.
Due to loss of a single phase, the other two normal (healthy)
phases have to draw more current than the rated one to
compensate the power. This increases the stator current,
consequently increasing the heat generated in the windings. This
leads to insulation failure which can cause further damage to the
motor.
Where,
t: Theoretical operate time in seconds
k, α: Constants characterizing the selected curve
I: Measured value of the characteristic quantity
I Pickup : Setting value
The Relay detects Phase Loss condition and gives:
TMS: Time Multiplier Setting, Time Constant
The constants, k has a unit of seconds, and α has no dimension.
Table 6-9 enlists the IDMT Over current settings available in the
Relay.
[(
Operating Time
t = TMS
Equation
Curve Type
]
k
a
I
I Pickup
)
k
α
Inverse
0.14
0.02
Very Inverse
13.5
1
Extremely Inverse
80
2
Pickup when one of phase current falls below 10 % of rated
current (IFLC) and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
Table 6 10 lists the Phase Loss Protection settings available in the
Relay.
Parameter
Setting range
Step
Increase
Factory
Settings
Trip Delay
0.1 to 30 sec
0.1 sec
1 sec
Mode
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
-
Local
Table 6-10: Phase loss Protection Settings
Table 6-8: IDMT formula
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Pickup Set
20 to 1000 % IFLC
5%
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Alarm Set
90% of pickup
-
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Time Constant
0.5 to 600 seconds
0.1 sec
5
IEC Curve
Type
Inverse, Very Inverse,
Extremely Inverse
-
Inverse
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
-
Local
Note: When phase currents for all the 3-phases falls simultaneously
below 10% of set full load current, the Relay will not detect this
condition as Phase loss.
400%
Voltage Based Protection
90%
Over voltage Protection (59)
Over voltage is a condition where voltage in the power circuit rises
above its preset value. Over voltage occurs usually due to internal
causes like switching surges, insulation failure, arcing ground and
Phase Loss.
The Relay detects the Over voltage condition and gives:
An Alarm when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above
the Alarm set value.
Pickup when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
Table 6-9: IDMT Overcurrent Protection Settings
Phase Loss Protection (47A)
Phase Loss Protection is also known as single phase protection.
Phase Loss is a condition in the 3-phase power circuit where one
phase of the supply is not available to the motor terminals.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
49
PROTECTIONS
Table 6 11 lists the Over voltage Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Pickup Set
101 to 130 % of VN
5%
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Alarm Set
95% of pickup
-
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Trip Delay
0.2 to 25 sec
0.1 sec
10 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
-
Local
Note: Under voltage protection is disabled for the starting time set in
the Relay. Under voltage protection will be inactive for voltage less
than 10% of nominal voltage. Trip and Alarm Responses for Under
Voltage can be separately con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
120%
Voltage unbalance Protection (47)
95%
Voltage unbalance is a condition where the voltage in the 3phases power circuit differs in magnitude or phase, or both.
Voltage unbalance would not affect the motor greatly. Voltage
unbalance condition occurs because of variation in the loads,
unbalanced incoming supply, due to Earth Faults etc,.
Voltage unbalance leads to unbalanced current. The effects of
unbalanced current are explained under Current unbalance
Protection.
The Relay detects Voltage unbalance condition and gives:
Table 6-11: Overvoltage Protection Settings
An alarm when unbalance of 3-phase voltages goes above the
Alarm set value.
Under voltage Protection (27)
Under voltage is a condition where the voltage in the power
circuit decreases below 90 percent of its normal voltage. Usually
Under voltage occurs during the heavy electrical demand (during
peak hours).
Under voltage fault heats up the motor, it leads to winding
insulation failure, this fails the motor permanently.
Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase voltage goes above the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
Unbalance in 3-phases voltage is calculated using formula:
[ (Vmax Vmin) /Vavg ] * 100 > Unbalance Set Value
Where,
Vmax: Maximum voltage of the 3-phases
Vmin: Minimum voltage of the 3-phases
The Relay detects the Under-voltage condition and gives:
Vavg: Average Voltage of the 3-phases
An Alarm when any of the 3-phase voltages reaches below the
Alarm set value.
Pickup when any of the 3-phases voltage reaches below the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
Table 6 12 Under-voltage Protection settings available in Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Pickup Set
20 to 85 % of VN
1%
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Alarm Set
110 % of pickup
-
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Trip Delay
0.2 to 25 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
50%
110%
Table 6 13 lists the Voltage Unbalance Protection setting available
in the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Pickup Set
5 to 50 % of VN
5%
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Alarm Set
90% of pickup
-
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Trip Delay
0.2 to 20 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
50%
90%
Table 6-13: Voltage Unbalance Protection Settings
Table 6-12: Under voltage Protection Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
50
PROTECTIONS
Phase reversal Protection (47B)
In 3-phase motors, the direction of motor is generally xed
according to the application. Motor will run in reverse direction
due to phase reversal. This condition is undesirable and leads to
severe damage to the process.
Reversal of phases is mainly caused due to power interruptions in
the circuit. When motor receives power after frequent power
interruption, there are chances of reversal of phases. It may also
occur when motors are disconnected for maintenance.
The Relay detects Phase reversal condition of 3-phase voltages (if
voltage connect is enabled) or current (if voltage connect is
disabled) and gives:
Pickup and trips instantaneously when the phase sequence of
the motor supply is different from the proper set sequence.
Table 6 14 lists the Phase reversal Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Parameter
Setting range
Phase Sequence
RYB or RBY
Factory
Step
Increase Settings
-
Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of
rated frequency.
Trip and Alarm Responses for Over Frequency can be separately
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Over frequency Protection (81H)
The Relay detects Over-frequency condition and gives:
An Alarm when the frequency reaches above the Alarm set
value.
Pickup when the frequency reaches above the pickup value
and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6 16 lists Over frequency Protection settings available in the
Relay.
Parameter
Setting range
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Pickup Set
101 to 105 % of FS
1%
RYB
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Alarm Set
99% of pickup
-
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Trip Delay
1 - 30 sec
1 sec
5 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
Mode
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
-
Local
Table 6-14: Phase Reversal Protection Settings
Frequency Based Protection
10%
99%
Table 6-16: Over Frequency Protection Settings
Under frequency Protection (81L)
The Relay detects Under-frequency condition and gives:
An Alarm when the frequency reaches below the Alarm set
value.
Pickup when the frequency reaches below the pickup value
and if the pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6 15 lists Under-frequency Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Pickup Set
94 to 98 % of FS
1%
Pickup Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Alarm Set
101% of pickup
-
Alarm Reset
As per hysteresis band
-
Trip Delay
1 - 30 sec
1 sec
5 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
94%
Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of
rated frequency.
Trip and Alarm Responses for Under Frequency can be separately
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Advanced Features
Re-acceleration (27LV)
Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor
automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage
dips.
There are two cases in Re-acceleration:
101%
1. Motor Re-acceleration function:
Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or
no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the
power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor
should continue to run without any interruption. The output
contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will
continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the
last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.
Table 6-15: Under Frequency Protection Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
51
PROTECTIONS
2. Motor Re-start function:
Parameter
Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or novoltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200
ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored
within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart
delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay,
then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to
UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy
restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be
started. Table 6 17 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings
available in the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Setting range
Voltage Dip
20 to 90 % of VN
5%
65%
Voltage Restoration
60 to 95 % of VN
5%
90%
Restart Time
0.2 to 60 sec
0.1 sec
5 sec
Restart Delay
4 to 1200 sec
1 sec
10 sec
Aux and Motor Supply
Same and Separate
-
Separate
Mode
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Table 6-17: Re-acceleration Protection Settings
Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/novoltage condition occurs.
Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart
command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.
Figure 6 4 shows the Re-acceleration ow chart with detailed working procedure of the Relay
Motor Running
(Voltage Stable)
New Voltage
Dip for
< 200 ms
(V<200)
In New V<200
within 1 second
of previous
(V<200)
Yes
Voltage Dip
for >200ms
(V>200)
RESTART DELAY timer
reloads and timer starts
again
RESTART
TIME timer
starts
Yes
No drop off for
MCOMP DO
contact. Motor
continue to run
No
Internal Timer starts
(upto 1 second)
Voltage resumes
before RESTART
TIME timer expires
RESTART
DELAY timer
starts
Is Voltage Dip before
RESTART DELAY and
RESTART Time expires?
No
RESTART DELAY timer expires
and start command given by
MCOMP
Motor Running
(Voltage Stable)
Figure 6-4: Re-acceleration ow chart
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
52
PROTECTIONS
Temperature Monitoring
Increase in temperature of the motor is caused mainly due to over
current, locked rotor, single phasing etc,. Increase in temperature
beyond the limit can cause insulation failure resulting in
permanent breakdown of motor.
Temperature Protection is provided in the Relay through RTD or
Thermistor (PTC) input. These sensors are placed on the windings
of the motor where the temperature needs to be measured. A
single RTD measures the temperature in terms of degree Celsius.
In case of PTC, relay measures the temperature in terms of Ohmic
value. Table 6 18 lists the temperature protection settings
available in the Relay.
PTC
Resistance
Open Circuit Trip
10000
Response
Resistance
Reset
Resistance
40
20
Response
Resistance
Trip
Open Circuit
Alarm/Pickup
Clear
Response
Alarm/Pickup
Clear
Short Circuit Trip
Short Circuit Trip
Time
The Relay detects high temperature condition and gives:
Figure 6-5: PTC protection working Philosophy
an Alarm when the temperature reaches above the Alarm Set
value.
Pickup when the temperature reaches above the pickup value
and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Parameter
Setting range
Sensor Type
RTD or PTC
Pickup Set (RTD)
25 180 ºC
Pickup Reset (RTD)
Alarm Set (RTD)
Alarm Reset (RTD)
Trip Delay (RTD)
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
RTD
1
Pickup Set 5ºC
95
90
Pickup Reset 5ºC
Alarm Set 5ºC
5 250 sec
100
1 sec
In case of PTC, if measured resistance goes above 10K , relay will issue a
trip command and trip cause will be PTC OPEN CIRCUIT. The alarm/pickup
value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset
Resistance. If PTC resistance goes above set value of RESPONSE
RESISTANCE then the relay will issue a trip command and trip cause will be
PTC RESPONSE RESISTANCE. The alarm/pickup value will be reset if the
PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset Resistance. If PTC resistance
goes below Short circuit Trip Resistance (20 ) then the relay will issue a
trip command and trip cause will be PTC SHORT CIRCUIT. The
alarm/pickup value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes above Short
circuit Reset Resistance (40 ). Table 6-19 shows the PTC Input
Speci cations supported by the relay.
85
Parameter
100 sec
Value
Response Resistance
2700 4000
Response Resistance (PTC)
2700 4000
50
3600
Reset Resistance
1600 2300
Reset Resistance (PTC)
1600 2300
50
1600
Short Circuit Trip Resistance
< 20
0.1 sec
Short Circuit Reset Resistance
> 40
PTC Open circuit resistance
> 10000
Trip Delay (PTC)
0.1 60 sec
0.1 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
Trip
Enable or Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
Maximum voltage at PTC terminals
Local
Table 6-18: Temperature Monitoring Settings
Note: Trip and Alarm response for Temperature protection can be
separately con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
RTD type which can be connected to the relay is PT-100. The relay
can measure the resistance from 100 to 175 ohm in case of RTD
connection which is equivalently shown in MCOMP display for
metering from 0 to 180oC. Any resistance greater than 175 ohm
seen by the relay will be shown as 0 ohm in temperature
metering. In case of Thermistor input, any PTC can be connected
to the relay. Maximum of 6 PTC can be connected in series and
given as an input to the relay.
Less than 7.5 V
(R ptc = 4 K)
Maximum voltage at PTC terminals
30 V
(R ptc = open)
Maximum number of sensors
6
Maximum cold resistance of PTC sensor chain
1500
Table 6-19: PTC Thermistor Input Speci cations
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
53
PROTECTIONS
The Relay detects communication failure condition and gives:
Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66)
Maximum number of starts protection prevents the damage to
the motor on effect of frequent starts. This protection allows the
motor to start only for a pre-speci ed number within a given
period. If the number of starts exceeds the set value, then this
protection keeps the Relay in inhibit mode, which prevents any
further motor start. Table 6 20 lists the Maximum Number of
Starts Protection settings available in the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
An Alarm when Relay does not receives any query from the
master device for the set time delay.
Trip if communication failure condition persists for the trip
delay after generation of an Alarm.
Table 6 21 lists Communication failure monitoring settings
available in the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
60 min
Time Delay
2 - 10 sec
1 sec
5 sec
1
20 starts
Trip Delay
1 - 30 sec
1 sec
5 sec
1 120 min
1
20 min
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Mode
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
Parameter
Setting range
Reference Period
15 - 60 min
1 min
Permissive Starts
1 30 starts
Inhibit Period
Table 6-20: Maximum number of starts Protection Settings
Table 6-21: Communication Failure Monitoring Settings
Fail to Stop Protection
Excessive Start Time Protection
In some cases motor fails to stop even when it receives stop
command, in this condition Fail to Stop Protection is needed. This
may occur because of improper connections and settings. This
protection monitors the current after STOP output is set. If the 3phase current is still present for two seconds after STOP output is
set, then a Trip will be issued on Fail to Stop Protection.
Excessive Start Time Protection is necessary when the motor takes
more time to start than the preset time. The motor draws high
current at the starting time (5-6 times of Full Load Current). If the
motor continues to draw higher current even after the starting
time, it causes insulation failure and burning of the windings.
Note: This protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled.
Interlock 1 to 12
The Relay is provided with 12 interlocks and any digital input can
be con gured as an interlock. Each interlock input can be
assigned a function such as Alarm, Trip, Stop, Reset, etc,.which
will be executed on the absence of that interlock (low signal on
that con gured interlock). Interlock con gured as Trip causes the
Relay to trip in the event of absence of the corresponding
Interlock.
The protection works on the basis of start time of the motor. It
monitors the current during the starting time and if it does not
follow the proper sequence then it will trip once starting time is
over.
Table 6 22 lists the Excessive Start Time Protection settings
available in the Relay.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Mode
Enable or Disable
-
Enable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication
-
Local
Table 6-22: Excessive Start Protection Settings
Note: Interlock functionality can be separately con gured through the
Display or MCOMP suite.
Analog Input Monitoring
Communication Failure Monitoring
Communication failure monitoring provides the alarm and
tripping action on failure of communication between the Relay
and the master device. The master can be either DCS or PLC or
SCADA. When "Trip only in Remote" setting is enabled, Relay
gives trip command only when motor is running in remote mode.
In case of motor running in local mode, Relay gives Alarm signal
only.
The two analog inputs available in expansion module supports 2
wire transmitter interface. The inputs supported are 4-20mA
input or 0-20mA input. The metered value can be used trigger the
alarm/trip when it crosses the set threshold value. The transmitter
converts the real world signal, such as ow, speed, position, level,
temperature, humidity, pressure, etc., into the control signal
necessary to regulate the ow of current in the current loop.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
54
PROTECTIONS
Table 6 23 lists the Analog Input Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Typical connection diagram for connecting the analog inputs in
MCOMP expansion module is shown below. It is recommended
to use twisted pair cable for analog input connection.
Step
Factory
Increase Settings
Parameter
Setting range
Analog input type
4-20mA or 0-20mA
-
4-20mA
Pickup Set
0 20 mA
0.1 mA
4 mA
Pickup Reset
0 20 mA
0.1 mA
3.8 mA
Alarm Set
0 20 mA
0.1 mA
3.6 mA
Alarm Reset
0 20 mA
0.1 mA
3.5 mA
Trip Delay
1 to 30 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Alarm
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Trip
Enable or Disable
-
Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote,
Communication, Auto
-
Local
MCOMP AI terminals
-ve
-ve
24 VDC supply
+ve
+ve
+ve
-ve
Transmitter/Sensor
Table 6-23: Analog Input Monitoring Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
55
COMMUNICATION
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
56
COMMUNICATION
Overview
Communication Protocol
The Relay has two ports for communication. The rst port is the
local con guration port used to communicate with the Display
and MCOMP Suite. This communication is on L&T proprietary
protocol. The second port is to communicate with the higher level
system such as EWS/DCS/SCADA. This communication is on
modbus or pro bus protocol.
Modbus RTU
Communication interface is the physical connection on a device.
Once the physical connection is established, the Relay
communicates with the master on a protocol.
This section provides a detailed description of Communication
Interface, Communication Protocols and Communication
Architecture of different protocols used in the Relay.
Modbus is a serial protocol which supports communication
between a single master device and multiple slave devices. In a
Modbus network, the protocol governs how each IED shall know
its device address, recognize a message addressed to it, determine
the kind of action to be taken, and extract any data or other
information contained in the message. If a reply is required, the
IED will construct the reply message and send it using Modbus
protocol. Table 7 2 shows the Relay Modbus RTU port
connections.
In the Relay, Modbus communication allows a Modbus Master
device to:
acquire metering, monitoring and event data from the Relay
Communication Interface
control the Relay output contacts
The Relay communicates with higher level system using protocols.
Table 7 1 enlists the different communication protocols available
in the Relay. The selection of protocol depends on the application.
acquire the Relay le system data for diagnostic
Communication Interface
Setting range
Setting range
Setting range
RS485
Modbus RTU
4 pin connector
Communication card
RS485
Profibus (DPV0, DPV1)
DB-9 pin connector
Communication card
RJ45
Modbus TCP/IP
RJ45 female connector
Communication card
RS485
L&T Proprietary
RJ11 connector
Controller card
RS485
L&T Proprietary
Mini USB connector
Display front
Table 7-1: Communication Interface
Note: The communication interface port in the Relay will depend on the selection of protocol at the time of ordering of the Relay.
Standard Pin
Standard RS485
signal
Description
Connection
required
Relay Pin
Relay RS485
signal
1
GND
Common Ground
No
NA
NA
2
CTS+
Clear to Send +
No
NA
NA
3
RTS+
Ready to Send +
No
NA
NA
4
RxD+
Received Data +
Yes
41,42
D+
5
RxD-
Received Data -
Yes
43,44
D-
6
CTS-
Clear to Send -
No
NA
NA
7
RTS-
Ready to Send -
No
NA
NA
8
TxD+
Transmitted Data +
No
NA
NA
9
TxD-
Transmitted Data -
No
NA
NA
Table 7-2: Modbus RTU port connection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
57
COMMUNICATION
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Table 7 3 lists of function codes supported by the Relay on
Modbus:
Code
Description
01
Read Coil Status (0X references, coils)
02
Read Input Status (1X references)
03
Read Holding Registers (4X references)
04
Read Input Registers (3X references)
05
Force Single Coil (0X references)
08
Diagnostics
Baud Rate: It de nes the speed at which the Relay communicates
with Modbus Master.
Parity: Parity can either be set as even, odd or none.
Stop Bits: Number of Stop Bits used can be set as one or two.
Modbus memory map
Modbus RTU Settings
Modbus requires communication parameters such as baud rate,
parity, node address etc, are to be set for establishing successful
communication with the master. Table 7 4 shows Modbus RTU
communication protocol settings.
Step Increase
Setting range
Mode
RTU
Mode: It de nes the mode of communication (ASCII or RTU). The
Relay supports only RTU mode.
Node Address: It de nes the node address of the Relay.
Table 7-3: Modbus Function Codes
Parameter
The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are
shown below:
Factory
Settings
RTU
Node Address
1 - 247
1
1
Baud Rate
9600 - 19200
9600
9600
Parity
Even, Odd, None
None
Stop Bits
One, Two
Two
Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters,
trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status.
Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the
memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the
addresses for slow scan parameters (or parameters pre-de ned at
certain addresses). Refer Annexure A for Modbus RTU memory
map.
Pro bus DP
Pro bus is an open, vendor-independent, eld bus protocol. The
Relay supports Pro bus DP-V0 for cyclic data exchange and DP-V1
protocol for acyclic date exchange (read only) between master
and slave devices.
PROFIBUS DP is a network that consists of two types of devices
connected to the bus: master devices and slave devices. It is a bidirectional network, meaning that one device, a master, sends a
request to a slave, and the slave responds to that request. Table
7 5 shows Pro bus port connections in the Relay.
Table 7-4: Modbus RTU Setting
Standard Pin
Standard RS485
signal
Description
Connection
required
Relay Pin
Relay RS485
signal
1
GND
Common Ground
No
1
NA
2
CTS+
Clear to Send +
No
2
NA
3
RTS+
Ready to Send +
No
3
NA
4
RxD+
Received Data +
Yes
4
D+
5
RxD-
Received Data -
Yes
5
D-
6
CTS-
Clear to Send -
No
6
NA
7
RTS-
Ready to Send -
No
7
NA
8
TxD+
Transmitted Data +
No
8
NA
9
TxD-
Transmitted Data -
No
9
NA
Table 7-5: Pro bus port connection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
58
COMMUNICATION
Pro bus Settings
Pro bus requires communication parameters to be set for
establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7 6
shows Pro bus communication protocol settings available in the
Relay.
Parameter
Setting range
Step Increase
Factory
Settings
Node Address
1 - 126
1
110
Table 7-6: Pro bus Setting
The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are
shown below:
Node Address: To de ne the node address of the Relay.
RTU, however with a different physical layer (Ethernet). TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol) govern
the data traf c control on the Ethernet media.
In other words, Modbus TCP/IP uses a Modbus RTU message
transmitted with a TCP/IP envelope and sent over a network
instead of serial lines. The Server does not have a Slave ID since it
uses an IP Address instead. Table 7 7 shows Modbus TCP/IP port
connections in the Relay.
The Relay communicates on Modbus TCP/IP using RJ45 port. It is
recommended to use Category 5 (Cat 5) or Category 6 (Cat 6)
without earth connection cable while connecting to MCOMP
main unit.
Modbus TCP/IP Settings
Baud Rate: Baud rate is governed by the Pro bus master
Pro bus memory map
Refer Annexure A for Pro bus memory map and GSD module
details.
Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus TCP/IP shares the same application layer as the Modbus
Modbus TCP/IP requires certain communication parameters to be
set for establishing successful communication with the master.
Table 7 8 shows Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol settings
available in the Relay.
The Relay supports Time synchronization using SNTP (Simple
Network Time protocol). To use this feature, the SNTP server
address and the proper time zone must be entered in the Relay
settings as shown in Table 7 8. The time zone is set as per user
location. In India, the time zone used is GMT+5h 30m.
Standard Pin
Standard RS485 signal
Description
Connection required
Relay Pin
Relay RS485 signal
1
Tx+
Transmit Data +
Yes
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
Transmit Data -
Yes
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
Receive Data +
Yes
3
Rx+
4
NC
Received Data +
No
4
NA
5
NC
Received Data -
No
5
NA
6
Rx-
Receive Data -
Yes
6
Rx-
7
NC
Ready to Send -
No
7
NA
8
NC
Transmitted Data +
No
8
NA
Table 7-7: Modbus TCP/IP port connection
Parameter
Mode (DHCP)
Setting Range
Step Increase
Enabled/Disabled
Factory Setting
Disabled
IP Address
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
1
192.168.121.127
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
1
255.255.254.0
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
1
None
SNTP Server Address
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
1
Two
Time Zone
+ 0 to 13 hours and 0 to 59 min
0
Table 7-8: Modbus TCP/IP Setting
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
59
COMMUNICATION
Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
Refer Annexure A for Modbus TCP/IP memory map and
parameter mapping.
Parameter Mapping
Parameter mapping setting allows de ne/con gure the
parameters to be sent on communication networks (Modbus
serial, pro bus, modbus TCP/IP) in sequential manner/consecutive
address as per requirement. The addresses for these mapped
parameters are xed in case of Modbus serial and Modbus TCP/IP.
16 words, 32 words and 142 bytes can be con gured in
parameter mapping for Modbus serial, Modbus TCP/IP and
Pro bus communication protocol respectively. 16 and 32 words
which can be de ned by MCOMP suite HMI for Modbus serial &
Modbus TCP/IP can be polled using function code 4 at the
addresses 0001 to 0016 and 0001 to 0032 respectively. This
con guration of parameters can be done through MCOMP suite
HMI.
Table 7-9 shows the list of available inputs for con guring in
parameter mapping.
Availability in case of
Description
Modbus Serial
Modbus TCP/IP
Profibus
R Phase RMS Current
√
√
√
Y Phase RMS Current
√
√
√
B Phase RMS Current
√
√
√
Earth RMS Current
√
√
√
Average RMS Current
√
√
√
R Phase RMS Voltage
√
√
√
Y Phase RMS Voltage
√
√
√
B Phase RMS Voltage
√
√
√
Average RMS Voltage
√
√
√
Frequency
√
√
√
Power Factor
√
√
√
Phase Sequence
√
√
√
Total Active Power
√
√
√
Total Reactive Power
√
√
√
Total Apparent Power
√
√
√
Total Active Energy
√
√
√
Total Reactive Energy
√
√
√
Number of Start
√
√
√
Starting Time
√
√
√
Starting Peak Current
√
√
√
Hours Run
√
√
√
Total Hours Run
√
√
√
Trip Counter
√
√
√
Trip Cause
√
√
√
Digital Input Status
√
√
√
Digital Output Status
√
√
√
Truth Table Outputs
√
√
√
Table 7-9 (1): List of inputs available in parameter mapping
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
60
COMMUNICATION
Availability in case of
Description
Modbus Serial
Modbus TCP/IP
Profibus
Signal Conditioners Outputs
√
√
√
Counter Outputs
√
√
√
Timer Outputs
√
√
√
Motor Status
√
√
√
Expansion Module Types
√
√
√
Expansion Module 1 status
√
√
√
Expansion Module 2 status
√
√
√
Expansion Module 3 status
√
√
√
R-Y Line Voltage
√
√
√
Y-B Line Voltage
√
√
√
B-R Line Voltage
√
√
√
Total Apparent Energy
x
x
√
Temperature
x
x
√
Thermal Capacity
x
x
√
Number Of Stop Operations
√
√
√
% Current Unbalance
x
x
√
Trip cause Ext
x
x
√
Motor Stop cause
x
x
√
Motor Inhibit cause
x
x
√
Status Word
x
x
√
DI-DO/ Timer/ Counter- Signal Conditioner
x
x
√
Logic Status
√
√
x
Remaining Logic status
√
√
x
Watchdog Register Status
√
√
x
Internal DIO status
√
√
x
External DIO status 1 & 2
√
√
x
Trip Record Trip Cause
√
√
x
Trip Record Date
√
√
x
Trip Record Time
√
√
x
Trip Record IR
√
√
x
Trip Record IY
√
√
x
Trip Record IB
√
√
x
Trip Record IEF
√
√
x
Trip Record VR
√
√
x
Trip Record VY
√
√
x
Trip Record VB
√
√
x
Table 7-9 (2): List of inputs available in parameter mapping
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
61
COMMUNICATION
Availability in case of
Description
Modbus Serial
Modbus TCP/IP
Profibus
Trip Record Frequency
√
√
x
Trip Record Temperature/Resistance
√
√
x
Trip Record Power factor
√
√
x
Trip Record Trip Cause 1
√
√
x
Table 7-9 (3): List of inputs available in parameter mapping
Status Word
Communication Architecture
The status word available in parameter mapping in case of
Pro bus protocol can be con gured as per requirement. Each bit
in the status word is open for user con guration. Table 7-10
shows brief list of available inputs for con guring in status word.
Modbus Architecture
Sr No.
Parameter Category Name
1
Base unit DI-DO
2
COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counter,
signal conditioner)
3
Expansion units DI-DO
4
Protection/Monitoring function bits (Alarm, Pickup, Trip)
5
Internal bits (run, star, delta, forward, reverse, main,
high speed, low speed, Drive available, Motor status,
motor direction, permissive outputs, communication
commands, indicator outputs etc)
6
Watchdog register status (Individual bits)
7
Stop cause (Individual causes)
8
Inhibit cause (Individual causes)
9
Expansion unit failure status
Figure 7 1 shows typical architecture for Modbus RTU and
Modbus TCP/IP. The Relays on Modbus RTU are shown to be
connected in a daisy-chain con guration in which a master is
connected to multiple slave devices in a chain sequence.
In case of Modbus TCP/IP, the Relays are shown to be connected
in a Star topology using Ethernet switches.
Pro bus Architecture
Figure 7 2 shows typical architecture for Pro bus. The Relays on
pro bus are shown to be connected with the master in a daisychain con guration.
Table 7-10: Brief list of inputs available for status word
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
62
COMMUNICATION
GPS Server for Time
Sycronization
To DCS on
Modbus TCP/IP
(Redunbant)
EWS STATION
To DCS on
Modbus TCP/IP
Laptop for
Parameterization
Serial Cable
RS 232
Ethernet
Switch
Data
Concentrator
Panel Area
Modbus TCP/IP
DAP serverTM
Ethernet Switch
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IP
Ethernet Switch
Modbus TCP/IP
Loop No-01
Loop No-01
Switchboard Area
Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus RTU
Figure 7-1: Typical Modbus Architecture
Laptop for
Parameterization
To DCS
To DCS
Pro bus - DP
Master
Pro bus - DP
Master
Pro bus - DP
Network
Switchboard Area
Serial Cable
Relay: RS 232
Pro bus - DP
Network
Switchboard Area
Figure 7-2: Typical Pro bus Architecture
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
63
SETTINGS
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
64
SETTINGS
Overview
motor to come to running state from starting state.
This section primarily consists of description of different setting
parameters available in the Relay and basic instructions to feed
those settings into the Relay in a very user friendly method. With
the help of these instructions, the user can view/edit the Relay
settings to suit the application. Instructions are further supported
with the help of ow charts/graphics and step-by-step
procedures. The Relay settings are saved in non-volatile memory.
The following Protection functions (both Alarm and Trip) are
disabled during this starting time:
Overload
Locked rotor
Under Current
Under Voltage
Over current
The user can view/edit following settings as per the requirement:
System Settings
Protection Settings
Communication Settings
Digital IO Settings
Parameter Map Settings
Frequency: It is the nominal frequency supplied as detected from
R phase voltage input when Voltage connect setting is enabled.
System frequency can be selected either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Running current: It is the normal running current of the motor
as % value of full load current. Under current protection setting is
dependent on this setting.
Display
Input Voltage Selection: It allows selection of system voltage
connection type as 3P-3W or 3P-4W. This setting is provided in
System setting window of MCOMP suite or Display and can be
selected as three phase-three wire (3P-3W) or three phase-four
wire (3P-4W). Upon selection, the Nominal voltage of the system
gets set in the relay accordingly.
MCOMP Suite
In case of 3P-3W, VN = VL-L and
Communication
in case of 3P-4W, VN = VL-L /
COMPlogic Settings
Relay Setting Modes:
3,
where VL-L = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage selected
in system setting of the relay.
Setting Parameters
System Setting Parameters
System setting determines the essential con guration parameters
pertaining to the general motor characteristics, method of
starting the motor, different modes of starting of motor, etc.
Different settings available under this are as follows:
Full load Current (IFLC): It is the maximum RMS current/rated
current a motor is designed to draw in normal running condition.
Motor Rated Voltage (VL-L): It is the Average RMS line to line
Voltage at which the motor operates at peak ef ciency. It is
possible to directly terminate 480 VL-L voltages on the Relay.
External PT is required for connecting voltages higher than 480
VL-L to the relay.
Auxiliary Supply (VAUX): It allows the selection of Power Supply
connected to MCOMP Base Unit. It is necessary to set correct
value of aux supply for calculation during power down mode.
Voltage Connect: If enabled, it provides voltage, power, energy
metering and allows detection of all voltage based protections.
Frequency is detected on the basis of R phase voltage only. When
disabled, voltage, power and energy measurement are not
available apart from voltage based protections.
All the voltage based protection is dependent on VN and hence
proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required
function.
Auto start and Stop detection: This setting is available for
detecting the start and stop condition of the motor when relay is
used only for protection purpose without having any control on
starting and stopping of the motor.
Auto Start Detection: In an application where the relay is used
only for metering and protection purpose and not for control
operation, it is required to sense the starting of the motor
through this auto start detection method. If enabled, the Relay
senses that the motor has started when the average current
sensed rises from 10 % IFLC to 100 % IFLC within 100 ms.
Current Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if
enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on
current auto stop cause when all the 3-phase currents falls
below 10 % of set full load current (IFLC).The cause of the
motor stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP
suite or display.
Trip Class: A numeric rating that correlates to the amount of time
it takes to trip the motor when an overload condition occurs
according to IEC60255 curve. Refer table 6-1 for details.
Voltage Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if
enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on
voltage auto stop cause when all the 3-phase voltage falls
below 10 % of nominal voltage (VN).The cause of the motor
stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP suite
or display.
Starting Time: It is the maximum time allowed by the relay to the
It is possible to start the motor through start command via digital
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
65
SETTINGS
input or communication even if auto start detection is enabled.
Starter Settings: This setting determines the type of starter used
to start the motor and their corresponding settings. Different
types of starters can be con gured as follows:
DOL: Direct on line - This option is selected when motor is
started by DOL starter only in one direction using digital input
sources - START1 or START2. It can be started through
communication as well if required.
RDOL: Reversible Direct Online Starter - This option is
selected when the motor is started by RDOL starter either in
forward or reverse direction using digital input sources
START1, START2, START3 and START4. It can be started
through communication as well if required. START1 & START3
is used to run the motor in Forward Direction and START2 &
START4 for Reverse Direction.
STAR DELTA: This option is selected when the motor is started
by Star - Delta starter using digital input sources Start 1 and
START2. It can be started through communication as well if
required.
When Star Delta is selected, two more settings to be set as
given below:
Time in Star: It is the time in seconds for which the Star output
is activated.
Change over Delay: It is the time interval between switching
from Star to Delta output.
TWO SPEED: This option is selected when the motor is
started by two speed starter using digital input sources Start 1
and START2. It can be started through communication as well
if required.
In case of Two-speed starter, the IFLC and External CT ratio
setting is neglected and separate set of IFLC and external CT
ratio is provided. High IFLC and Low IFLC settings and
corresponding external CT ratio settings gets activated as
required.
Parameter
Setting Range
Step Increase
Factory Setting
Full Load Current
0.6 80 A (up to 600 A in
case of external CT)
0.1 A up to 20A
1A afterwards
1A
1V
415 V
Motor Rated Voltage
380
800 V
24, 110, 230
Auxiliary Supply
Enable/Disable
Voltage Connect
Trip Class
Enable
5 - 40
Starting Time
1
5
200
1
50 and 60Hz
Frequency
Running Current
230
20
10
10
50 Hz
100 % IFLC
1%
100 %
Input Voltage
3Phase-3Wire or 3Phase-4Wire
3Phase-4Wire
Auto Start Detection
Enable/Disable
Disable
Current Auto Stop
Enable/Disable
Disable
Voltage Auto Stop
Enable/Disable
Disable
Table 8-1: System Settings
Parameter
Setting Range
Step Increase
Type
DOL, RDOL, STAR DELTA, TWO SPEED
Time in star
1 to (starting time -1) sec
Change over delay
High IFLC, Low IFLC
External CT ratio
0.1
0.6
200 sec
0.1 sec
80 A (up to 600 A with external CT)
Factory Setting
Star Delta
Star Delta
Two Speed
For High IFLC, for low IFLC
Two Speed
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
All
Modes of Starting
Local
Remote
Communication
Start 1 & 3
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
All
Start 2 & 4
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
All
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
All
Table 8-2: Starter Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
66
SETTINGS
Modes of Starting matrix: Different starting modes can be
con gured using con guration matrix as shown in Table 8-3.
START3 and START4 are used in RDOL, TWO SPEED starter.
START1 and START3 are for forward, High Speed starts
whereas START2 and START4 are for reverse, low speed start.
Selection of starting modes (L1, L2, L3 or R) depends on the status
of mode selection bits available in communication (Output
Command Byte 0 - bit 0.6 and bit 0.7) or status of digital inputs
(con gured as Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2). At any
given time, mode selection is possible either through
communication or through digital inputs to the relay.
Corresponding
setting
Mode
selection
through
communication is provided in the relay which decides whether
mode selection is through communication bits or through digital
inputs statuses. Refer below table for mode selection.
Mode selection through communication: This setting is used
to decide the mode selection place i.e. whether the control for
mode selection is with communication bits or it is with digital
inputs (Local/Remote switch on the panel).
Modes of starting
When mode selection through communication is enabled then
bits of Output Byte 0 i.e. 0.6 and 0.7 will be considered for
deciding the mode. The combination will lead to four modes as
mentioned above.
When this setting is enabled, then mode selection can only be
possible through communication commands and any con gured
DI (Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) for mode
selection will be ignored. The mode selection will act as per status
of bit 0.6 and bit 0.7.
When this setting is disabled, there will be no action on the mode
selection even if the communication bits 0.6 and 0.7 changes its
state. Mode selection then solely depends on the con gured DI
(Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) and will act
according to con gured DI status.
Parameter
Setting Range
Factory Setting
Mode selection
through communication
Enable/Disable
Disable
Table 8-3: Mode selection through communication setting
Local 1 (L1)
Local 2 (L2)
Local 3 (L3)
Remote (R)
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Local (Display/MCOMP suite)
Remote (Digital Inputs)
START 1 (and START 2)
START 3 (and START 4)
Communication
Table 8-3: Modes of starting matrix
Local/Remote_1 OR
Comm bit 0.6
Local/Remote_2 OR
Comm bit 0.7
Mode
0
0
L1
1
L2
0
L3
1
R
0
1
1
Functional Description
When in local1 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
When in local2 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
When in local3 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
When in Remote mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
Table 8-3a: Mode selection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
67
SETTINGS
Note: If there is no setting of local / Remote DIs & mode selection
through communication then the Local 1 mode will be followed by
default.
When mode selection from communication is enabled &
Communication gets failed, then mode switches to Local 1 mode.
If only Local/Remote_1 is con gured in one of the digital inputs and
Local/Remote_2 is not con gured then only L1 and R mode will be
active.
Four mode operation(L1,L2,L3,R) and mode selection through
communication setting is applicable only when Relay communicates
on Pro bus protocol and does not hold good for Modbus and Modbus
TCP/IP protocols. In case of Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP relays, normal
two mode operation (local and remote) is supported.
External CT Ratio: For motor ratings having FLC higher than 80A
(approx. 45KW), the relay requires external conventional
protection class CT s for sensing the three phase currents along
with its own current module. The external CT ratio mode needs to
be enabled for higher motor ratings and different parameters of
the external CT needs to be specify in the setting eld as shown in
the Table 8-4 :
Parameter
Setting Range
Factory Setting
Primary Current
2 1000 A
1A
Secondary Current
1 or 5 A
NA
Mode
Enable/Disable
Table 8-4: External CT ratio setting
PT Ratio: For connecting voltages higher than 480 VL-L, the
external PT ratio mode needs to be enabled and different
parameters of the external PT needs to be specify in the setting
eld as shown in the below Table 8-5 :
Parameter
Setting Range
Factory Setting
Primary Voltage
1 800 V
1V
Secondary Voltage
110 - 230 V
1V
Mode
Enable/Disable
Table 8-5: External PT ratio setting
Event Records: This setting determines whether the Pick Up,
Alarm and Trip event need to record by the relay or not.
Parameter
Setting Range
Pick Up
Enable/Disable
Trip
Enable/Disable
Alarm
Enable/Disable
Table 8-6: Event Record setting
Display Password: This setting allows changing the value of the
display password and available through MCOMP suite only.
Parameter
Setting Range
Password
1111 - 9999
Table 8-7: Display Password setting
Mode Change: If enabled, when any of the con gured input
changes its state during motor running condition, the relay
generates the trip command. The modes of reset can be
con gured for this trip function.
Parameter
Setting Range
Input 1
Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs
Input 2
Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs
Mode change
Enable/Disable
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
Table 8-8: Mode Change setting
Phase Selection: This setting allows selection of the number of
voltage inputs connected to the relay i.e. two phase (R and Y) or
three phase (R, Y and B). In case of two phase input, the third
phase voltage is calculated from connected two phase voltages.
Refer chapter application notes for more details.
Latched Trip function: This setting allows selection of the trip
output functionality in case of relay s aux. supply failure. If
enabled, the already energized trip output will remain active after
power recycle of the relay.
Feeder Type: This setting allows selection of the feeder type as
motor or heater feeder. Heater feeder selection is for non-motor
load application i.e. MCCB/Heater feeder application. Refer
chapter application notes for more details.
Motor Tag: In this eld the actual process tag for the
motor/feeder can be set.
Start command through communication: This setting allows
selection of start command as momentary or maintained.
In case of momentary, the start bits (bits of Output Command
byte 0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below
functionality.
Bit is 1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if
all other conditions are healthy
Bit is 0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
In case of maintained, the start bit (bits of Output Command byte
0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below functionality.
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all
other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
68
SETTINGS
Parameter
Setting Range
Phase Selection
Two Phase, three phase
Trip latch
Enable/Disable
Feeder Type
Motor/Heater
Motor/Feeder Tag
Alpha numeric characters can be entered
Start command through
communication
Momentary/Maintained
Digital Input Features
Digital Inputs accept 80-240 V AC/DC or 230 V AC/DC or
110V AC/DC or 24 VDC voltage input for sensing depending
upon the ordering of the Relay.
Validation period is a user con gurable debounce period
provided with each digital input in order to validate the
authenticity of the signal.
Digital Output Features
Table 8-9: System setting 2
All four Digital Outputs are potential free, change-over
contacts.
Protection Setting Parameters
Pl refer chapter 6 : Protection for details of protection setting
parameters.
Digital outputs can be con gured as either pulse mode
(unlatch) or level mode (latch). In case of pulse mode, the pulse
width (hold time) is user con gurable.
Digital Outputs can be used to drive the main power contactor
without using any auxiliary contactors.
Digital Input Output Setting Parameters
This section provides a brief description about Digital
Inputs/Outputs for performing con gured operations. In addition,
this section also provides information about DIO Expansion
Module used to increase the number of DIOs.
DIO Expansion Module
DIO Expansion Module is used to increase the number of DIOs in
the Relay. DIO Expansion Modules are available in two types:
4DI/2DO module
Basic Digital Input/Output
8DI module
The Relay is provided with six Digital Inputs and four Digital
Outputs. DIOs are freely con gurable by the user as per the
scheme. DIOs are hard-wired connections which enable the user
to remotely operate and control the motor. These DIOs have
following characteristics:
5DI/2AI module
3DI/2AI/2DO module
User can connect maximum three expansion modules to the base
unit. Table 8 10 gives the all the possible combinations of DIO
expansion modules that can be used in addition with the base
unit.
Single unit Combination
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 2
Expansion unit 3
1
4DI/2DO
X
X
2
8DI
X
X
3
5DI/2AI
X
X
4
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
X
Two unit Combination
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 2
Expansion unit 3
1
4DI/2DO
8DI
X
2
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
X
3
4DI/2DO
5DI/2AI
X
4
4DI/2DO
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
5
8DI
8DI
X
6
8DI
5DI/2AI
X
7
8DI
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
Table 8-10 (1): Expansion Module Combination matrix
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
69
SETTINGS
Three unit Combination
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 1
Expansion unit 2
Expansion unit 3
1
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
2
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
3
8DI
8DI
8DI
4
8DI
8DI
5DI/2AI
5
8DI
8DI
3DI/2DO/2AI
6
8DI
4DI/2DO
5DI/2AI
7
8DI
4DI/2DO
3DI/2DO/2AI
Table 8-10 (2): Expansion Module Combination matrix
Digital Input Settings
The following settings are used to con gure any Digital Input:
Type: This decides the functionality of input. Each input type is
unique i.e. user cannot assign one Type to two Digital input.
Incase input is not used, Type is selected as NONE.
User can select any of the digital input types as explained below:
START1:
a. In case of DOL starter, if START1 input is applied, then
con gured RUN digital output is activated (provided drive
status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
b. In case of RDOL Starter, if START1 input is applied, then
con gured FORWARD relay digital output is activated
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if START1 input is applied, then
con gured Star/Delta digital output sequence will start
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if START1 input is applied,
then con gured High Speed digital output is activated
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
START2:
a. In case of DOL Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 input
is applied, con gured RUN digital output is activated
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). If L/R
input is absent, RUN output will not be activated if START2
is applied.
b. In case of RDOL Starter, if input is present then con gured
REVERSE Relay digital output is activated (provided drive
status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if L/R input is high and START2
input is applied, con gured Star/Delta digital output
sequence will start (provided drive status is healthy i.e.
ready to start). If L/R input is absent, Star/Delta output
sequence will not be activated if START2 is applied.
d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if input is applied, then
con gured Low Speed digital output is activated (provided
drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
START3 & START4:
These types of input are applicable only in case of RDOL starter.
a. If L/R input is high and START3 input is applied, then
con gured FORWARD RELAY digital output is activated
indicating drive running in forward direction in remote
mode. If L/R input is absent, FORWARD output will not be
activated if START3 is applied.
b. If L/R input is high and START4 input is applied, con gured
REVERSE RELAY digital output is activated indicating drive
running in forward direction in remote mode. If L/R input is
absent, REVERSE output will not be activated if START4 is
applied.
STOP:
Stop is a reverse logic. For any type of starter, STOP input should
always be present in order to start the drive. If input is removed,
then the drive stops immediately and goes to inhibit condition
until STOP input is released i.e. goes high. If the input is not high,
relay inhibits the drive start.
LOCAL/REMOTE:
L/R input is for deciding local and remote mode operation of the
drive. If the input is low, the relay takes it as local mode and drive
can be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta
starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive
cannot be started through START2 input in case of DOL &
Star/Delta Starter or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL
starter.
If the input is high, relay takes it as remote mode and drive can be
started through START2 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta starter
or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive cannot
be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta
Starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
70
SETTINGS
INTERLOCK 1 to 12:
NONE:
Interlock indicates healthiness of the system. If any one of
interlock becomes low, then relay acts as per the interlock
con guration done.
ESTOP:
Emergency Stop is a Reverse Logic. If input is removed or becomes
low, the relay will STOP the motor. If this input is low, drive is
allowed to start if valid start command is present. Only on next
high to low transition, relay will stop the drive through ESTOP.
When selected for an input, no action for that particular input.
Mode: This setting is available only for Digital inputs: START1,
START2, START3 and START4. Mode de nes whether a particular
input is to be continuously monitored or momentarily.
Validation Period: Validation period is user con gurable debounce period provided with each Digital Input in order to
validate the authenticity of the signal.
Interlock Con guration: This setting is visible only when
corresponding Digital Input is con gured as Interlock 1 to 12. The
Interlock can be con gured as:
Disable: No action will be taken on interlock.
CONTACTOR FEEDBACK 1 and 2:
Alarm: If the interlock is absent then the Alarm output will be
activated.
After drive starting, if contactor feedback is not available within
set contactor time , relay will stop the drive. During running
condition, if contactor feedback becomes low, then drive will be
stopped immediately.
Trip: If the interlock input is absent then a Trip output will be
activated after the set trip delay.
Contactor feedback 1 is for main contactor in case of DOL starter
or FORWARD contactor in case of RDOL starter. Contactor
feedback2 is for REVERSE contactor in case of RDOL starter.
Interlock 1 to 12: If the interlock input is absent, Indicator 1
output will be activated (if Indicator 1 is con gured as Digital
Output for Interlock).
Local Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Local
Reset.
RESET:
This input is for resetting the trip condition of the motor when
modes of reset in any protection is selected as remote . If
motor is in trip condition and reset input becomes high, it will
reset the trip. Under normal condition, if this input becomes high,
it will be simply ignored. For taking trip resetting action Input
should undergo Low to High Transition.
Communication Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it
inhibits Communication Reset.
Auto Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Auto
Reset.
Remote Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits
Remote Reset.
Stop: If interlock input is not present then, it inhibits motor from
starting. Also motor will be stopped if running.
TEST:
This input when high indicates relay is in test position. In test
condition, all the inhibit conditions gets ignored and start/stop
operation can be performed to check control wiring in the
module.
Interlock is considered for Test: If Enabled, interlocks are taken
into consideration when the Relay is put in TEST Mode.
Interlock Trip Delay: It is available if any of interlock is
con gured in TRIP Mode.
Reset Modes: It is available if any of interlock is con gured in
TRIP Mode. Reset modes are con gurable.
Parameter
Setting Range
Type
Start1 to Start4, Stop, Reset, Local/Remote, Estop, Contactor Feedback1,
Parameter
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Interlock 1 to 12, None
Mode
Momentary or Maintained
Validation Period
0.1 - 60 sec
Interlock configuration
Enabled or Disabled
Interlock is considered for test
Enabled or Disabled
Interlock Trip delay
0.1 10 sec
0.1 sec
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
Local
0.1 sec
Table 8-11: Digital Input Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
71
SETTINGS
Digital Output Settings
sec) if following conditions are satis ed:
The following settings are used to con gure any Digital Output:
a. Drive is in stop condition
Table 8 11 shows the Digital Input settings.
b. No trip condition
Type: This decides the functionality of output. Incase output is
not used, Type is selected as NONE.
c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.
User can select any of the digital output types as explained below:
This output is activated when corresponding PERMISSIVE_
OUTPUT command is received on communication from
PLC/SCADA/DCS.
ALARM:
Whenever there is an alarm/pickup condition, then Alarm output
is activated.
TRIP:
If there is any trip condition (due to protection or interlock), then
Trip output will be activated and all start outputs (RUN or
FORWARD RELAY or REVERSE RELAY or STAR or DELTA or MAIN
or HIGH SPEED or LOW SPEED) will be dropped.
FOLLOW:
When selected, it follows the status of con gured parameter after
follow delay.
RUN:
If starter type is DOL and if there is a valid start command (either
through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then
RUN output will be activated (provided drive status is healthy).
FORWARD AND REVERSE RELAY:
If starter type is RDOL and if there is a valid start command i.e.
forward or reverse (either through MCOMP suite/Display or
communication or DI) then FORWARD or REVERSE RELAY output
will be activated respectively (provided drive status is healthy).
MAIN, STAR and DELTA:
If Starter type is STAR/DELTA and if there is a valid start command
(either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI),
then Star-Delta sequence follows as below.
a. First Main and "Star" output will be activated.
b. After 'Time in Star' delay Star output will be dropped, then
after 'Changeover delay' Delta output will be activated.
HIGH SPEED & LOW SPEED:
If Starter type is Two Speed and if there is a valid start command
i.e. high speed start or low speed start (either through MCOMP
suite/Display or communication or DI), then High Speed sequence
or Low Speed sequence starts respectively.
INDICATORS (1 to 12):
Indicator output will be activated when the corresponding DI
interlock con gured as INTERLOCK is low.
DRIVE AVAILABLE:
PERMISSIVE_OUTPUT (1 to 3):
TRUTH TABLE OUTPUT (1 to 16):
This is logic status generated by truth tables which can be directly
assigned to energize the digital output contact.
SIGNAL CONDITIONER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
This is logic status generated by Signal conditioner which can be
directly assigned to energize the output contact.
TIMER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
This is logic status generated by Timer which can be directly
assigned to energize the output contact.
COUNTER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
This is logic status generated by Counter which can be directly
assigned to energize the output contact.
NONE:
When selected for an output, no action for that particular output.
Mode: There are two modes available for output,
Level: The corresponding output is activated till next command to
drop the output.
Pulse: The corresponding output is activated for the hold time,
which is user con gurable.
Hold Time: This setting is visible only in pulse mode. It is the time
for which the corresponding Digital Output is activated when the
output is triggered.
Follow Delay: This setting is visible only in FOLLOW type. It is the
time to activate the corresponding Digital Output after the source
parameter is activated.
Heater Delay: This setting is visible only in HEATER type. It is the
time to activate the HEATER output after ful lling the below
conditions:
a. Drive should be in stop position and healthy.
b. No trip condition.
c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.
The Heater Output is used in winding heating application. Table
8 12 shows the Digital output settings.
This output is activated when relay is not in inhibit condition and
drive is in stop condition. During running condition, this output
goes low stating drive is not available.
HEATER:
This output is activated after set heater delay (range is 1 to 3600
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
72
SETTINGS
Analog Output Settings
One 4 - 20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay which can
be con gured to any of the parameter given in Table 8 13.
If the value of selected parameter is less than or equal to
minimum set value, Analog output gives 4 mA & if the parameter
value is equal to or greater than maximum set value, it gives 20
mA.
Parameter
Setting Range
Parameter
Type
Alarm, Indicator 1 to 12, Follow 1 to 2, Run, Main , Start, Delta, Forward Relay,
Reverse Relay, Trip, Drive Available, Heater, High Speed, Low Speed,
Permissive_Output_1 to 3, Truth Table outputs, Signal Conditioner Outputs, Timer &
Counter outputs, None
Mode
Level or Pulse
Hold Time
0.1 1000 sec
0.1 sec
Follow Delay
0.1 1000 sec
0.1 sec
Heater Delay
1 3600 sec
1 sec
Table 8-12: Digital Output Settings
Type
Unit
Min
Max
Step Size
R Phase Current
A
0
3600
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
Y Phase Current
A
0
3600
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
B Phase Current
A
0
3600
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
Average Current
A
0
3600
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
R Phase Voltage
V
0
375
1
Y Phase Voltage
V
0
375
1
B Phase Voltage
V
0
375
1
Average Voltage
V
0
375
1
R-Y Line Voltage
V
0
375
1
Y-B Line Voltage
V
0
375
1
B-R Line Voltage
V
0
375
1
Apparent Power
kVA
0
28.3
0.1
Active Power
kW
0
28.3
0.1
Reactive Power
kVAR
Temperature
Frequency
0
28.3
0.1
o
C
0
200
1
Hz
0
75
1
Table 8-13: Analog Output Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
73
SETTINGS
If there is any error in factory set calibration of analog o/p then
user can offset the error using Manual scale factor option (manual
calibration). Analog Output can be manually calibrated using
manual scale factor option; by setting 'Expected Output' and
'Actual Output' which is getting observed for selected parameter.
Considering the linear behavior in current output, we can nd out
the expected analog output current for applied input value of a
parameter. Table 8-14 gives Manual scale factor setting of Analog
output.
assign logical outputs as Digital outputs and also transmit
them over communication soft link on Modbus RTU, Modbus
TCP/IP, Pro bus for HMI/DCS applications.
Figure 8 1 shows the general overview of COMPlogic:
COMPlogic Modules
COMPlogic comprises of 4 modules:
Parameter
Setting Range
Step Increase
COMPlogic Module
Number of Modules
Expected Output
4- 20 mA
0.1
Truth Table
16
Actual Output
1 24 mA
0.1
Signal Conditioner
2
Timer
2
Counter
2
Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings
Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings
Communication Setting Parameters
Refer chapter-7: Communication for details of communication
setting parameters available in the relay.
COMPlogic Setting Parameters
COMPLogic is a part of the MCOMP suite parameterization
software. COMPlogic provides exibility to select any parameter
as an input of the Boolean modules and perform gate operation
to get desired output. The user can program the required logic
using different modules such as truth tables, signal conditioners,
timers, and counters. Different logic gates available in truth table
are AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, and Custom mode. The user can
de ne its own logic gate using custom mode.
COMPlogic is an important feature used to build and execute
logical schemes within the Relay. Using COMPlogic a user can:
Truth Table
A truth table shows the output of a logical circuit for all
combinations of inputs using logic gates. In COMPlogic user has
an additional exibility in customizing the logic according to the
application.
There are 16 Truth Tables available in the Relay COMPlogic.
2 Input 1 output (Two tables)
3 Input 1 output (Four tables)
4 Input 1 Output (Ten Tables)
Signal Conditioner
simplify existing physical complexities into simple logical blocks
there by reducing additional hard writing
There are two Signal Conditioners available in the Relay
COMPlogic, each of which can be con gured to one of the
following four types:
create cascaded logical blocks where output of one logical
block can be used as input of another logical block
1. Non inverting
2. Inverting
3. Positive Edge Latch
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
4. Negative Edge Latch
Output 1
Output of signal conditioner is triggered by conditioning input
either on,
Level: by sensing level of input (high or low level).
Output 2
Output 3
Edge: by sensing transition from low level to high level (+ve
edge) or high level to low level (-ve edge).
DI 4
Timer
Event/
Trip
Restart
Output Trip
Figure 8-1: COMPlogic Overview
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
74
SETTINGS
Input Down: A positive edge transition on this input decrements
the count.
Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not permitted.
Input
Reset: This input resets the counter output to low level and count
to zero.
Limit: It is a maximum count limit at which counter output is
triggered. The limit range is from 1 to 65535.
Reset
Output
NON-INVERTING
The counter output will be set high once the count is equal to
limit. It stays latched until the reset is high. For example set
counter limit to 4, Figure 8 3 illustrates the working of a Counter
with the help of waveforms.
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
Input Up
Input
2
1
0
Input
Down
Reset
Reset
Output
Output
INVERTING
Figure 8-3: Counter
There are two Timers available in Relay COMPlogic which can be
selected from any one of the following four types.
Input
1. Level triggered ON Timer
2. Rising edge ON Timer
Reset
3. Falling edge OFF Timer
4. Rising edge OFF Timer
Output
POSITIVE EDGE LATCH
Figure 8 4 shows a basic block diagram of a Timer.
Timer
Input
Input
Output
Limit
Reset
Reset
Figure 8-4: Block Diagram of Timer
Output
NEGATIVE EDGE LATCH
Figure 8-2: Signal Conditioners
Counters
There are two Counters available in Relay COMPlogic. The
counter output is generated based on the following inputs:
Input Up: A positive edge transition on this input increments the
count. Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not
permitted.
Level triggered ON Timer
Figure 8 5 shows operation of Level triggered ON Timer.
Timer triggers on input high level. After timer countdown, output
triggers provided input still remains at high level. If input drops
before timer countdown, then the timer reloads as shown in
section-1.
Section-2 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown
then,
Timer is reloaded.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
75
SETTINGS
Output is reset to low level.
rising edge of input and remains latched even if input drops. After
timer countdown, output is set to low level as shown in section-1.
Section-2
Section-1
Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is
sensed the timer reloads as shown in section-2.
Section-3 shows if reset is high before the timer countdown then
the timer drops & reloads and hence the output drops. If output is
already high and reset is sensed before timer countdown then
output remains high.
Input
Reset
If reset is high before the application of the input, output remains
at low level till reset drops as shown in section-4.
Time
Section-1
Section-3
Section-2
Section-4
Output
Input
Figure 8-5: Level Triggered ON Timer
Reset
Rising edge ON Timer
Figure 8 6 shows operation of Rising edge ON Timer.
Timer triggers on rising edge of input. After timer countdown,
output triggers and remains latched even after input drops to low
level. Output drops when reset is at high level as shown in
section-1.
Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is
sensed the timer reloads and restarts the countdown as shown in
section-2.
Section-3 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown
then,
Output
Figure 8-7: Falling Edge OFF Timer
Rising edge OFF Timer
Figure 8 8 shows operation of Rising edge OFF Timer.
Timer and outputs are triggered on rising edge of input. After the
timer countdown, output is set to low level. If input drops before
countdown, then timer drops, reloads and hence output drops as
shown in section-1.
Timer is reloaded.
Output is reset to low level.
Section-1
Time
Section-2
Section-3
Input
Section-2 shows if reset is at high level before the timer
countdown, then timer drops and reloads.
Section-3 shows if reset is present before the application of input,
then output remains at low level.
Reset
Section-1
Time
Input
Output
Reset
Figure 8-6: Rising Edge ON Timer
Falling edge OFF Timer
Section-2
Section-3
Time
Output
Figure 8 7 shows operation of Falling edge OFF Timer.
Timer triggers on falling edge of input. Output is triggered on
Figure 8-8: Rising Edge OFF Timer
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
76
SETTINGS
List of logical Inputs
Source of Input
Name of Input
Description
Start from Communication
Stop from Communication
Communication
Status bit will get Set on receiving START or STOP or RESET command over
communication.
Reset from Communication
Permissive_Output_1
Permissive_Output_2
These statuses are general purpose Set/Reset commands given from master
device over communication.
Permissive_Output_3
Fixed Levels
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Logic Module
Outputs
Motor Status Data
Motor Status
as per specific
starter Type
FIXED 0
Input fixed to 0
FIXED 1
Input fixed to 1
DI 1 to DI 6
Base unit digital input
DI 1-1 to DI 1-8
Expansion unit 1 digital inputs
DI 2-1 to DI 2-8
Expansion unit 2 digital inputs
DI 3-1 to DI 3-8
Expansion unit 3 digital inputs
DO 1 to DO 4
Base unit digital outputs
DO 1-1 & DO 1-2
Expansion unit 1 digital outputs
DO 2-1 & DO 2-2
Expansion unit 2 digital outputs
DO 3-1 & DO 3-2
Expansion unit 3 digital outputs
TT 1 to TT 16
Truth table outputs
SIGNAL CONDITIONER1 O/P
& SIGNAL CONDITIONER2 O/P
Signal conditioner outputs
TIMER1 O/P & TIMER2 O/P
Timer outputs
COUNTER1 O/P & COUNTER2 O/P
Counter outputs
MOTOR DIRECTION
0 for forward or Low speed & 1 for reverse or High speed
PICK UP STATUS
0 on no pickup or pickup reset condition & 1 for active pickup
INHIBIT STATUS
0 for motor healthy conditions & 1 for Inhibit condition
ALARM STATUS
0 for no alarm or alarm reset condition & 1 for active alarm
TRIP STATUS
0 when no Trip or trip reset condition & 1 for active Trip
MOTOR RUNNING STATUS
0 for motor not running in any of the starter mode & 1 for motor
running in any of the starter mode
DRIVE AVAILABLE
0 for inhibit condition or running condition & 1 for ready to start i.e.
no inhibit condition
RUN
In DOL starter ; this status will be 1 for high RUN output
FWD RELAY
In RDOL starter; this status will be 1 for high forward running output
i.e. FWD RELAY
REV RELAY
In RDOL starter; this status will be 1 for high reverse running output
i.e. REV RELAY
MAIN
In Star Delta starter; this status will be 1 for high MAIN output
Table 8-15 (1): Logical Inputs
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
77
SETTINGS
Source of Input
Motor Status
as per specific
starter Type
Interlocks
Protection Bits
Name of Input
Description
STAR
In Star Delta starter; this status will be 1 for high STAR output
DELTA
In Star Delta starter; this status will be 1 for high DELTA output
HIGH SPEED
In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be 1 for high HIGH SPEED output
LOW SPEED
In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be 1 for high LOW SPEED output
INDICATOR1 to INDICATOR12
Indicator status will become 1 if status of corresponding Interlock input,
configured as Indicator is low i.e. "0
PROTECTION TRIP
Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing TRIP status.
PROTECTION ALARM
Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing ALARM status.
PROTECTION PICKUP
Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing PICKUP status.
Table 8-15 (2): Logical Inputs
Relay Con guration
8.
Change the value using Up, Down navigation keys.
Relay Con guration through the Display
9.
Press ENT to con rm the selected value.
The Display is designed to be compatible with the Relay. The
Display also serves as a medium between the Relay and MCOMP
Suite using mini USB cable readily available as phone charging
cable. Settings can be done by using the Display as described
below and shown in the following ow chart:
10. Press Return to save the changed value with option as
YES/NO.
Procedure to con gure the IFLC value using the Display:
11. Select YES and press ENT to con rm the save.
12. Press Return for save message con rmation. After successful
saving, a pop up window will appear showing message as
SAVED . At this stage, the PWR/COMM LED turns On
in the following sequence: Green-Orange-Green.
13. Press Return key till Settings menu screen appears.
1. Press ENT button to move from metering parameter view to
menu window.
14. Use Up, Down keys to go to commands menu.
2. Use Left, Right navigation keys to go to settings menu.
15. Press ENT to go inside the commands menu.
3. Press ENT to inside settings menu.
16. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed
further.
4. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed
further. Default password is 1111.
5. Press ENT to go into system settings.
6. Press ENT to go into IFLC setting.
7. Press ENT to edit the IFL value.
17. Use Up, Down keys to go to the MCOMP reset option.
18. Press ENT to send the command for MCOMP reset. One can
also do a power recycle of the MCOMP main unit instead of
sending MCOMP reset command through display. This will
put the new settings into effect.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
78
SETTINGS
Ir
:
Metering
0.0A
Iy
:
0.0A
Ib
:
0.0A
Iavg
:
0.0A
Settings
<>
ENT
ENT
Settings
ENT
<>
System
Protection
Digital I/O
Settings
PASSWORD
ENT
X X X X
Edit
View
ENT
System
Full load Current
Motor Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
Full Load Current
ENT
I c
SAVE?
: 10.1A
Full Load Current
ENT
I c
Full Load Current
YES
NO
I c
: 11.0A
: 10.1A
Full Load Current
ENT
I c
: 11.0A
ENT
System
Settings
Full load Current
Motor Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
Sy
SAVED
P
Digital I/O
<>
Edit
View
Settings
<>
COMMANDS
PASSWORD
X X X X
Settings
ENT
ENT
Commands
<>
Commands
Motor Start 1
Motor Start 2
Motor Stop
Motor Start 2
Motor Stop
MCOMP Reset
Commands
ENT
Motor Start 2
CMD Sent
Motor Stop
MCOMP Reset
Figure 8-: Display operating procedure
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
79
SETTINGS
Relay Con guration through MCOMP suite
Procedure to con gure the IFLC value using MCOMP Suite:
MCOMP Suite is a software developed for local parameterization
and monitoring of the Relay. MCOMP Suite provides a user
friendly environment for con guration and parameterization of
the Relay.
1. Open MCOMP Suite window and switch to Con guration
mode.
2. Press Read All to read all the settings before changing the
settings.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
80
SETTINGS
3. After successful read, press System Settings to get the
following screen.
4. Press Motor Settings, change IFLC value by choosing a
required value from drop down button, next to the IFLC value bar
and press Write All.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
81
SETTINGS
5. If user is in Admin Mode, online changes in settings are directly
saved after writing the settings. If user is in Supervisor Mode
user needs to reset MCOMP after using Write All option.
Procedure to save the settings in Supervisor Mode is:
Monitoring Window
Special Commands
Reset MCOMP
Relay Con guration through Communication
The Relay consists of three communication protocols: Pro bus,
Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP. Out of these three
communication protocols, only Modbus TCP/IP can be used for
remote parameterization over communication. Each parameter
has its own holding register address (Function Code 03). Holding
register address for each parameter is shown in Modbus TCP/IP
Memory Map.
Send
thermistor inputs for temperature sensing. MPR shall take CBCT
inputs for sensitive earth fault detection of 2A. The motor details
speci ed by motor manufacturer are:
Full load Current = 53 A, Voltage = 415 V, Frequency = 50 Hz
Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC
Starting time at 100% full load = 0.2 second
Type of Starting = Direct On Line
Procedure to con gure the IFLC value through Communication:
1. Refer Modbus TCP/IP memory map for holding register address
of the particular parameter.
2. Poll particular register (40151) of IFLC to see the current value
of IFLC.
3. Write required value of IFLC by considering scaling factor.
4. Poll the IFLC register.
Solution:
Selection of MCOMP Relay:
Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can
be selected.
Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_T_YI_P
Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C5_1
Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using
Motor data
Case 1:
In an appapplication, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required
for 30 kW motor with 5DI and 4DO. MPR shall work on 230 VAC
supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and
shall be communicable on Modbus TCP/IP. MPR shall accept
Above selected relay main unit have universal aux supply, Modbus
TCP/IP communication, universal DI sensing voltage and
thermistor (PTC) input port. Current module is type-5 which
covers full load current of 53 A with 1meter CM cable. Display
unit is selected of 240 aux supply with 1 meter display cable for
local panel metering. Expansion module part number is not
selected as DI/DO requirement is ful lled by main unit itself.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
82
SETTINGS
To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown below:
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
System
Settings
Motor
Settings
Refer
Figure 8-1
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
System
Settings
Starter
Settings
Refer
Figure 8-1
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
Protection
Settings
Locked
Rotor
Refer
Figure 8-1
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
Protection
Settings
Earth
Fault
Refer
Figure 8-1
Case 2:
Solution:
In an application, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required for
90kW motor with 9DI and 5DO. MPR shall work on 230VAC
supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and
shall be communicable on Pro bus. MPR shall accept RTD input
for temperature sensing. The motor details speci ed by motor
manufacturer are:
Selection of MCOMP Relay:
Full load Current = 162A, Voltage = 415V, Frequency = 50 Hz
Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC
Max Starting time = 1 sec
Type of Starting = Reverse Direct On Line
As the required motor FLC is more than 81A, we need to use
external conventional CTs along with MCOMP CM. The external
CTs should be chosen such that FLC of the motor falls in 50% to
100% of external CT primary. Since FLC is 162 A, a 200 :1 or
200:5 CT may be chosen. Let us choose 200:1 CT. The MCOMP
CM selection will depend on conventional CT secondary. For 1A
and 5A secondary, the required CM should be CM1 and CM2
respectively. So CM1 is required. The expansion unit of 4DI/2DO
along with relay main unit will serve the 9DI/5DO requirement.
Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can
be selected.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
83
SETTINGS
Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R
Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_1
Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Expansion Unit: MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_1
Basic settings to be done in the Relay as:
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
System
Settings
Motor
Settings
Refer
Figure 8-2
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
System
Settings
Starter
Settings
Refer
Figure 8-2
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
Protection
Settings
Locked
Rotor
Refer
Figure 8-2
Settings
(Con guration Mode)
Protection
Settings
External
CT Ratio
Refer
Figure 8-2
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
84
SETTINGS
Setting Sheet
System Settings
Motor Tag
Motor Tag (10 characters)
=____________________
Motor Settings
Full Load Current (IFLC)
0.6
600 A
=____________________
Motor Rated Voltage (VL-L)
380
800 V
=____________________
Auxiliary Supply (VAUX)
24, 110, 230 V
=____________________
Voltage Connect
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Class
Class 5 - 40
=____________________
Starting Time
1
=____________________
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
=____________________
Running Current
20
=____________________
Input Voltage
200 seconds
100 % IFLC
3 Phase - 3 Wire or
3 Phase
=____________________
4 Wire
Auto Start detection
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Current Auto Stop
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Voltage Auto Stop
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Type
DOL, RDOL, STAR/DELTA, TWO SPEED
=____________________
Time in Star
1 to (starting time -1) seconds
=____________________
0.1
200 seconds
=____________________
0.6
600 A
=____________________
0.6
600 A
=____________________
Modes of Starting
Local and Remote
=____________________
Local_L
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Local_R
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Starter Settings
(Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)
Change Over Delay
(Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)
High Speed IFLC
(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)
Low Speed IFLC
(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)
Remote_Start1&2_L
(Visible if Type = RDOL)
Remote_Start3&4_R
(Visible if Type = RDOL)
Communication_L
Table 8-16 (1): System settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
85
SETTINGS
Event Records
Communication_R
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pick Up
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Alarm
Enable or Disable
=____________________
1111 - 9999
=____________________
Primary Current
1
=____________________
Secondary Current
1A or 5A
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Primary Voltage
1
=____________________
Secondary Voltage
110
PT Ratio Enable
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=________________________
Phase Selection
Phase Selection
Two Phase or Three Phase
=____________________
Latched Trip
Latched Trip
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Feeder Type
Feeder Type
Motor or Non Motor
=____________________
Display password
Admin
External CT Ratio
1000 A
PT Ratio
800 V
230 V
=____________________
Mode Change
Table 8-16 (2): System settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
86
SETTINGS
Protection Settings
Overload
Current Set (ISET)
20
Pickup Set
100 % ITM
=____________________
Alarm Set
80
=____________________
Thermal Memory
Enabled
=____________________
Thermal Memory Reset Value
5
=____________________
Thermal Inhibit Setting
30
95 % ITM
=____________________
Pause Setting
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pause Time Delay
1
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Auto, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
50
=____________________
Alarm Set
90% of pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.1
=____________________
Rest Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
30
85 % IR
=____________________
Alarm Set
110 % of pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.1
=____________________
Rest Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
5
=____________________
Alarm Set
85
Trip Delay
1
Rest Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Earth Fault Type
VECTOR_SUM or CBCT
=________________________
Pickup Set (Ief)
20
=____________________
100 % IFLC
100 % ITM
30 % ITM
1200 seconds
=____________________
Over Current
1000 % IFLC
10 seconds
Under Current
120 seconds
Current Unbalance
100 % IFLC
100 % of pickup
30 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Earth Fault
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)
500 % IFLC
Table 8-17 (1): Protection settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
87
SETTINGS
Pickup Set (Ief)
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Set
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)
Alarm Set
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
20 A
=____________________
90% of pickup
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
0.1
Pickup set value A
Trip Delay (Run)
0
60 seconds
=____________________
Trip Delay (Start)
0
25 seconds
=____________________
0
60 seconds
=____________________
0
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Delay (Run)
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Delay (Start)
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Rest Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
150
=____________________
Alarm Set
90% of Pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.5
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
20
1000 % IFLC
=____________________
Time Constant
0.5
600 seconds
=____________________
Curve Type
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
101
=____________________
Alarm Set
95% of Pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.2
=________________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
20
=____________________
Locked Rotor
1000 % IFLC
30 seconds
IDMT Overcurrent (Stage 1 and 2)
Over Voltage
130 % VN
25 seconds
Under Voltage
Pickup Set
85 % VN
Table 8-17 (2): Protection settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
88
SETTINGS
Alarm Set
110 % of Pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.2
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication, Auto
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
5
50 % VN
=____________________
Alarm Set
90 % of Pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.2
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Phase Sequence
RYB or RBY
=____________________
Reset modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Delay
0.1
=____________________
Rest Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
101
105 % FS
=____________________
Alarm Set
99 % of Pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
1
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Pickup Set
94
98 % FS
=____________________
Alarm Set
101 % of Pickup
=____________________
Trip Delay
1
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=________________________
Voltage Dip
20
90 % VN
=____________________
Voltage Restoration
65
95 % VN
=____________________
Restart Time
0.2
60 seconds
=____________________
Restart Delay
4
1200 seconds
=____________________
25 seconds
Voltage Unbalance
20 seconds
Phase Reversal
Phase Loss
30 seconds
Over Frequency
30 seconds
Under Frequency
30 seconds
Re-acceleration
Table 8-17 (3): Protection settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
89
SETTINGS
Aux and Motor Supply
Same or separate
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Time Delay
2
10 seconds
=____________________
Trip Delay
1
30 seconds
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Auto
=____________________
Trip only in Remote
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Rest Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Reference Period
15
=____________________
Permissive Starts
1
30 starts
=____________________
Inhibit Period
1
120 minutes
=____________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
RTD (PT-100) or Thermistor(PTC)
=____________________
Communication Failure
Excessive Start Time
Maximum Number of Starts
60 minutes
Temperature
Sensor Type
Pickup Set
(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Pickup Reset
(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Alarm Set
(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Alarm Reset
(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Trip Delay
(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Response Resistance
(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
Reset Resistance
(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
Trip Delay
(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
25
=____________________
180 oC
5 oC
Pickup Set Value
Pickup Reset Value
Alarm Set Value
5
5 oC
5 oC
250 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
2700
4000 ohm
=____________________
1600
2300 ohm
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=________________________
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Alarm Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Trip Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Table 8-17 (4): Protection settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
90
SETTINGS
Hysteresis Band
Current
3
15 %
=____________________
Voltage
3
15 %
=____________________
Frequency
1
15 %
=____________________
Table 8-17 (5): Protection settings
Communication Settings
Protocol Selection
Modbus, Profibus, Modbus TCP/IP
=____________________
Modbus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus)
Mode
RTU
=____________________
Node Address
1
=____________________
Baud Rate
9600 or 19200
=____________________
Parity
None, Even, Odd
=____________________
Stop Bits
One, Two
=____________________
247
Profibus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Profibus)
Node Address
1
=____________________
126
Modbus TCP/IP (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus TCP/IP)
DHCP Mode
Enable or Disable
=____________________
IP Address
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
=____________________
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
=____________________
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
=____________________
SNTP Server Address
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
=____________________
Time Zone (GMT)
+/-, 0 - 13 hours, 0
59 minutes
=____________________
Table 8-18: Communication settings
DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)
IO Settings
Input 1
Type
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Table 8-19 (1): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
91
SETTINGS
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
Table 8-19 (2): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
92
SETTINGS
Input 3
Type
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 4
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
Table 8-19 (3): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
93
SETTINGS
Interlock Trip Delay
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1
10 seconds
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Input 5
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
=____________________
Interlock Config
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 6
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
60 seconds
Table 8-19 (4): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
94
SETTINGS
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Output 1
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Output 2
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
Table 8-19 (5): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
95
SETTINGS
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Output 3
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Output 4
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Table 8-19 (6): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
96
SETTINGS
Expansion IO Module 1
Module Type
8DI or 4DI+2DO or None
=____________________
Module ID
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1
or None
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Input 1-1
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 1-2
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
60 seconds
or Contactor Feedback2)
Table 8-19 (7): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
97
SETTINGS
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1
10 seconds
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Input 1-3
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1
10 seconds
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Table 8-19 (8): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
98
SETTINGS
Input 1-4
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 1-5
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Table 8-19 (9): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
99
SETTINGS
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 1-6
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 1-7
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Table 8-19 (10): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
100
SETTINGS
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 1-8
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Table 8-19 (11): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
101
SETTINGS
Interlock Considered for Test
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Output 1-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Output 1-2
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Table 8-19 (12): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
102
SETTINGS
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Module Type
8DI or 4DI+2DO or None
=____________________
Module ID
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1
or None
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Expansion IO Module 2
Input 2-1
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
=____________________
Table 8-19 (13): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
103
SETTINGS
Input 2-2
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2-3
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Table 8-19 (14): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
104
SETTINGS
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2-4
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1
10 seconds
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Input 2-5
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Table 8-19 (15): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
105
SETTINGS
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2-6
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Table 8-19 (16): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
106
SETTINGS
Interlock Considered for Test
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2-7
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2-8
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
60 seconds
or Contactor Feedback2)
Table 8-19 (17): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
107
SETTINGS
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Output 2-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Output 2-2
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Type
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Table 8-19 (18): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
108
SETTINGS
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Expansion IO Module 3
Module Type
8DI or 4DI+2DO or None
=____________________
Module ID
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1
or None
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Input 3-1
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1
10 seconds
=____________________
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Table 8-19 (19): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
109
SETTINGS
Input 3-2
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-3
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Table 8-19 (20): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
110
SETTINGS
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-4
(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-5
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Table 8-19 (21): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
111
SETTINGS
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-6
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
0.1
10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
Table 8-19 (22): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
112
SETTINGS
Interlock Considered for Test
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-7
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,
Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
=____________________
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
0.1
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-8
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Type
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
60 seconds
or Contactor Feedback2)
Table 8-19 (23): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
113
SETTINGS
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
0.1
60 seconds
=____________________
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
=____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay
0.1
10 seconds
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
Enable or Disable
=____________________
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
=____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Output 3-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Type
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Output 3-2
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Type
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,
Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
=____________________
Table 8-19 (24): DIO settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
114
SETTINGS
Mode
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay
(Visible if Type = Heater)
Level or Pulse
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
0.1
1000 seconds
=____________________
1
3600 seconds
=____________________
Table 8-19 (25): DIO settings
Parameter Mapping Settings
Parameter mapping
(Hidden if Protocol Selection = Profibus in communication settings)
16 words (in case of Modbus serial)
32 words (in case of Modbus TCP/IP)
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
User configurable as per requirement
Table 8-20: Parameter mapping settings
COMPlogic Settings
Truth Tables
2I/1O Truth Table 1
2I/1O Truth Table 2
3I/1O Truth Table 3
3I/1O Truth Table 4
Table 8-21 (1): COMPlogic settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
115
SETTINGS
3I/1O Truth Table 5
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
3I/1O Truth Table 6
3I/1O Truth Table 7
3I/1O Truth Table 8
3I/1O Truth Table 9
3I/1O Truth Table 10
Table 8-21 (2): COMPlogic settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
116
SETTINGS
3I/1O Truth Table 11
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
Input 1
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 2
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 3
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input 4
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Gate Operation
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
=____________________
3I/1O Truth Table 12
3I/1O Truth Table 13
3I/1O Truth Table 14
3I/1O Truth Table 15
3I/1O Truth Table 16
Table 8-21 (3): COMPlogic settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
117
SETTINGS
Signal Conditioners
Signal Conditioner 1
Type
Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive Edge
Latch, Negative Edge Latch
=____________________
Input
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Reset
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive Edge
Latch, Negative Edge Latch
=____________________
Input
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Reset
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Limit
1
65535 count
=____________________
Input Up
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input Down
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Reset
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Limit
1
65535 count
=____________________
Input Up
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Input Down
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Reset
Freely Programmable
=____________________
0
=____________________
Signal Conditioner 2
Type
=____________________
Counters
Counter 1
Counter 2
Timers
Timer 1
Limit
65535 seconds
Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge
Type
ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer,
=____________________
Rising Edge OFF timer
Input
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Reset
Freely Programmable
=____________________
0
=____________________
Timer 2
Limit
65535 seconds
Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge
Type
ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer,
=____________________
Rising Edge OFF timer
Input
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Reset
Freely Programmable
=____________________
Table 8-21 (4): COMPlogic settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
118
USER INTERFACE
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
119
USER INTERAFCE
Overview
This section provides a detailed description of local interfacing
methods available with the Relay. There are two local modes
available for a user to interface with the Relay.
The MCOMP Suite can run in MCOMP of ine mode as well. In this
case, settings may be saved for future use. If the Relay is
connected to a computer and communications are enabled, the
Relay can be programmed from the setting screens.
MCOMP Suite Interface.
Display Interface.
Software Pre-requisites:
Operating System supported is Microsoft Windows XP, Vista
and Windows 7.
MCOMP Suite Interface
MCOMP Suite is software available with the Relay through which
a user can monitor, control or con gure the Relay, also serves as a
strong diagnostic tool for troubleshooting purpose. A PC is
required to host this software through which it can communicate
with the Relay. The MCOMP Suite can be used only after the
installation of .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 or higher.
With MCOMP Suite, it is possible to:
monitor and meter the data: Various metering parameters
such as 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current, Frequency, Phase
Sequence and parameters related to Power and Energy can be
monitored. The status of Digital inputs and outputs can also be
monitored.
program and modify the settings: The software allows a
user to set the values as per requirement.
read actual values: A user can get the actual motor running
values.
read motor status: A user can check the status of motor run, stop or trip condition.
read pre-trip & trip cause data and number of event
records: A user can get the recent 5 trip records and causes for
the trips.
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 or higher
MCOMP Suite: (in MCOMP Suite folder).
Hardware Pre-requisites:
Minimum memory space required on root drive of hard disk is
1GB.
Pentium 4 computer with 2GHz speed and 512MB RAM.
RS485 Converter.
Installation Guide
.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation
After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use
the following procedure to install the .NET Framework 3.5 Service
Pack 1 (If it is not installed, install the framework from the folder
'Framework3.5SP1').
1. Double click on FrmWrk3.5sp1, to get the setup le
Dotnetfx35sp1.exe.Double click on Dotnetfx35sp1.exe to install
.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1.
Screenshot - 1
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
120
USER INTERAFCE
2. Read and accept the terms of the license agreement and click
on Install button.
4. When the installation is completed, Windows gives a message
.NET Framework 3.5 Sp1 has been installed successfully.
Screenshot - 2
Screenshot - 4
3. After accepting the license agreement, Windows will start
installing the setup. Status bar shows the progress.
Screenshot - 3
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
121
USER INTERAFCE
Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation
MCOMP Suite installation can be carried out by using Multiversion MCOMP Suite.
1. Double click on the setup.exe of Multi-version MCOMP Suite.
Screenshot - 1
2. Multi-version MCOMP Suite setup wizard guides the user
through the steps required to install Multi-version MCOMP Suite
on computer. Press Next button to continue.
3. Select the installation path by pressing Browse button. Press
Next button to continue with the setup. (Multi-version MCOMP
Suite can install for all users who uses this computer or for self
depending on access).
Screenshot - 2
Screenshot - 3
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
122
USER INTERAFCE
4. Con rm installation: The installer is ready to install the Multiversion MCOMP Suite on your computer. Click on Next to start
the installation.
5. After successful installation press Close button to nish the
setup.
Screenshot - 4
Screenshot - 5
MCOMP Suite Installation
2. Double click on the above icon to install MCOMP Suite from
MCOMP Suite multiversion setup in two ways Manual Selection
and Auto Selection:
Using Multi-version MCOMP Suite user can install MCOMP Suite.
1. Double click on Multi-version MCOMP Suite icon
In case of Manual Selection: Select the MCOMP Firmware Version
and click on Install MCOMP Suite option.
In case of Auto Selection user can select the MCOMP version
directly by reading MCOMP rmware version from the Relay and
Click on Install MCOMP Suite option.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
123
USER INTERAFCE
3. Click on Next to start installation.
Operation Guide
MCOMP Suite Con guration
Con gure the MCOMP Suite to work with the Relay using
following steps:
Double click on the MCOMP Suite short cut icon, the next
window will prompt for user ID and password. A three level of
access is provided to a particular user depending on the readwrite permission. Enter the user id and password.
4. After the installation gets completed, an icon as shown below
will be created as a shortcut on the desktop of the computer.
Table 9 1: MCOMP Suite Access shows the available access to
login MCOMP Suite.
Sr. No.
Access
Login Type
Function
Read
Write
1
Admin
√
√
Provided with additional privileges and system data access
2
Supervisor
√
√
No administrative privileges on system data access. User can only change/modify the Relay settings.
3
User
√
√
Read only mode. User can not change/modify the Relay settings.
Table 9-1: MCOMP Suite Access
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
124
USER INTERAFCE
After entering the user ID and password, the main
(Monitoring) window will appear.
Monitoring Mode
Options
Click on the Options tab to con gure the communication
settings required for the MCOMP Suite. User can select the
appropriate COM port, to which the Relay is connected. Other
parameters such as Device ID, Baud Rate, Parity and Stop Bits will
remain same.
To connect the MCOMP Suite through the Display, select the
check box Connect through Display. The user can also select a
theme from the drop down box as per the requirement.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
125
USER INTERAFCE
Change Password
Switch To Con guration Mode
Click on Change Password tab to change the existing password.
In this case user has to enter old password and then set a new
password. The MCOMP Suite will validate the old password and
stores the new password.
Click on Switch To Con guration Mode tab to view the
following window.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
126
USER INTERAFCE
About
Zoom Out
Click on About tab to view the version of the MCOMP Suite.
Click on Zoom Out tab to zoom out the size.
Short cuts: [CTRL + -] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Down].
Zoom to Fit
Click on Zoom to Fit to zoom to normal size.
Short cuts: [CTRL + *] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Button].
Con g Report
Click on Con g Report tab to generate a report. A printable
report will be saved in an XML format as shown below:
Zoom In
Click on Zoom In tab to zoom in.
Short cuts: [CTRL + +] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Up].
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
127
USER INTERAFCE
The path for the generated report is as shown below:
C:\Program Files\M COMP Suite\M COMP Suit v4.4.1\SETTINGS_20102522_172420.xml
New User
Supervisor
Click on New User tab to create a new login account.
Click on Supervisor tab to view list of supervisors. This option
allow administrator to block or unblock a supervisor.
User
Click on User tab to view list of users. This option allows
Administrator/Supervisor to block or unblock a user.
Start Monitoring
Click on Start Monitoring tab to monitor various measurable
parameters. If the Relay is connected to PC and the
communication is working without any error, then MCOMP Suite
will display a system message: MCOMP Online!!!
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
128
USER INTERAFCE
Record Viewer
Record Viewer is used to view the trip/event records and starting
curve of the motor. The Relay can store last ve trip and event
records.
- The window shows the trip cause, date and time of occurrence
and pre-trip values.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored trip records.
- Click Report to generate a report of trip records with date and
time.
- It also maintains the trip counter that counts the number of
trips occurred.
The Trip indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red when the
Relay senses trip condition. Click on Trip tab to view trip
records. The trip record window shows the details of the last
ve trips along with causes in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence:
Note: On occurrence of an error, the MCOMP Suite will display an error
message Error in reading the data from MCOMP. Retry again. Check the
connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.
Trip Records
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
129
USER INTERAFCE
The Alarm/Pick-up indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red
when the Relay senses alarm/pick-up condition. Click on
Alarm/Pick-Up tab to view event records. The event record
window gives the details of last ve events along with event
source in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence.
- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of
occurrence.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.
- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date
and time.
Event Records
Click on Start Curve tab to view the last starting curve stored
by the Relay. Press Plot Graph to plot the graph of starting
current Vs time. The curve stored can also be compared with
the present curve using the Compare Graph option.
- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of
occurrence.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.
- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date
and time.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
130
USER INTERAFCE
Control
Memory Dump
Motor Start 1: to start the motor in forward direction.
Memory Dump option is an administrative command used to
create for different system les of the Relay. Click on Start Dump
option to dump the default settings into the Relay and the status
bar will show the progress. After completion of memory dump,
the MCOMP Suite will give a message as Memory Dump
completed. Then close the pop-up window using Close option.
Motor Start 2: to start the motor in reverse direction.
Trip Reset: to reset the trip condition of the Relay.
Note: Control option can be used only when the MCOMP Suite is online.
Note: On occurrence of any error if the MCOMP is not connected, then
MCOMP Suite will show an error message Error in writing . Check the
connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.
Special Commands
The user can send individual commands to the Relay using Special
Command option. Special Command is used to check the Relay
status and also can used for diagnostic and troubleshooting
purpose.
Click on Special Command tab to enter the command terminal.
The status bar shows the status of the sent command and action
taken.
Caution: Memory Dump command is not recommended during
normal operation; should be strictly used only under guidance of
the manufacturer.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
131
USER INTERAFCE
Con guration Mode
Click on Switch to Con guration Mode tab to enter into
con guration mode, the following window appears:
Note: The user can shift to con guration mode if the Relay is of ine.
In con guration mode the user can set the
following parameters:
System settings
Protection settings
Communication settings
IO settings
Parameter settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
132
USER INTERAFCE
Different le operations can be carried out using following:
4. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Files
read Successfully!!!.
Read Selected
This option is used to read selected con guration les from the
Relay.
1. Click on Read Selected tab to read only the selected
con guration parameters. The MCOMP Suite will prompt the user
to save the con guration or not. Select Yes to save the
con guration else select No.
2. Enter a name to save the con guration
window.
le in the below
5. If MCOMP Suite is unable to read the le from MCOMP, it will
give an error message as Read failed
Write Selected
This option is used to write selected con guration les into the
Relay.
1. Click on Write Selected tab, MCOMP Suite will prompt a
warning message as Online con guration of MCOMP Relay
(when motor is running) is not recommended . Select OK to
proceed or cancel to abort the write operation.
3. After saving the con guration, the MCOMP Suite prompts the
user to read the le. Select Yes option in the pop-up window to
read the le.
2. MCOMP Suite will prompt to con rm if the con guration
needs to be saved. Select YES to save the con guration in case
user wants to save the le.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
133
USER INTERAFCE
3. Enter a name to save the con guration le and click Save.
Write All
This option can be used to write all the con guration les into the
Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Write Selected le
menu. After write completion, the MCOMP will give a message
as, All Setting Files written Successful!!!.
4. After saving the con guration, MCOMP Suite will prompt for
con rmation to write the le. Select Yes to write the
con guration else select NO.
Note: It is strictly recommended to perform read all operation before writing any
settings into the MCOMP relay.
New File
5. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, File
Write Successful!!
New File is used to save all the parameters into a new
con guration le.
Save File
6. If MCOMP Suite is unable to write the le to MCOMP, it will
give an error message as Failed to write le .
Read All
This option can be used to read all the con guration les from the
Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Read Selected le
menu. After read completion, the MCOMP will give a message as,
All Files read Successfully!!!.
Save File is used to save the le into the current con guration le
(if the le exists).
Open File
Open File is used to open and load the
con guration le into M COMP Suite.
le from existing
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
134
USER INTERAFCE
Con guring System Settings
System settings determine the starting method and general
motor characteristics. The following settings are available under
system settings:
Click on System Settings tab to view the available setting using
MCOMP Suite:
To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown
below:
System
Settings
Motor
Settings
Set value for particular
parameter
Write All/ Write
Selected
The motor setting window displays all the available parameter
settings. Some of them are shown below:
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
135
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Starter Settings, follow the path shown
below:
System
Settings
Starter
Settings
Set Type, mode of
parameter
Write All/ Write
Selected
The starter setting window displays all the available parameter
settings:
Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.
Con guring Protection Settings
Protection Settings allow the user to set different alarm/pick-up
values and con guration time delays for each protection provided
in the Relay.
Click on Protection Setting tab to view the following window:
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
136
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Earth Fault Settings, follow the path
shown below:
Protection
Settings
Earth
Fault
Set pick-up, alarm/trip,
delay as required
Write All / Write
Selected
The earth fault window displays all the available parameter
settings.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.
Con guring Communication Settings
be displayed according to its hardware.
Communication Settings allow the user to set the parameters for
Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and Pro bus Communication
protocol. The communication settings available in the Relay will
Click on Communication Settings tab to view the following
window:
Note: Protocol selection is possible only in Admin mode.
Modbus Settings:
To navigate to the Modbus Settings, follow the path shown
below:
Communication
Settings
Modbus/Pro bus/
Ethernet selection
Set required
values
Write All / Write
Selected
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
137
USER INTERAFCE
The Modbus setting window displays all the available settings.
Pro bus DP Settings:
To navigate to the Pro bus Settings, follow the path shown
below:
Communication
Settings
Modbus/Pro bus/
Ethernet selection
Set required
node address
Write All / Write
Selected
The pro bus setting window displays all the available settings.
Modbus TCP/IP Settings:
To navigate to the Pro bus Settings, follow the path shown below:
Communication
Settings
Modbus/Pro bus/
Ethernet selection
Set required
values Selected
Write All / Write
The Modbus TCP/IP setting window displays all the available
settings.
Note: In case of Time synchronization using SNTP, enter correct SNTP
address and time zone.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
138
USER INTERAFCE
Con guring IO Settings
IO settings allow the user to con gure the basic, expansion digital
Inputs/ digital outputs and analog outputs as applicable.
Click on IO Settings tab to view following window:
Click on IO Settings option to view all available DIOs and Analog
output available in the basic Relay.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
139
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Digital Input Settings, follow the path
shown below:
IO
Settings
Select Digital
Input as required
Set required
parameters
Write All / Write
Selected
Set required
parameters
Write All / Write
Selected
The Digital Input window displays all the available settings.
If selected input is interlock, select interlock con guration as
shown in the following screen.
Note : Follow the same procedure for other Digital Inputs.
User can not assign one Type to two digital inputs.
To navigate to the Digital Output Settings, follow the path
shown below:
IO
Settings
Select Digital
Output as required
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
140
USER INTERAFCE
The Digital Output window displays all the available settings.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other Digital Outputs.
If the output is selected as HEATER, select the heater delay time in
seconds.
To navigate to the Analog Output Settings, follow the path
shown below:
IO
Settings
Select Analog
Output
Set required
parameters
Write All / Write
Selected
The Analog Output window displays all the available settings
To navigate to the External IO Settings, follow the path shown below:
IO
Settings
Select required
external IO module
Set required
parameters
Write All / Write
Selected
Click on External DIO Module number and ID option and select
Module Type. Below screen shows all available settings.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other expansion IO modules.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
141
USER INTERAFCE
Con guring Parameter Mapping
Parameter Mapping allows the user to select parameters and
store them in a contiguous Fast scan Register. In case of Modbus
RTU, the fast scan register stores up to 16 words and for Modbus
TCP/IP up to 32 words.
To navigate to the Parameter Mapping Settings, follow the
path shown below:
Parameter
Mapping
Select
parameter
Add/remove
parameter
Write All / Write
Selected
Note: Memory Map Option is used only when communication protocol
select is as Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP/IP.
Click on Parameter Mapping tab to view all available parameter
mapping option.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
142
USER INTERAFCE
Con guring COMPlogic
Click on COMPlogic tab to view all available COMPlogic
modules.
To navigate to the 3I/1O Truth Table, follow the path shown
below:
COMPlogic
Settings
3I/1O
truth table
Select I/P
parameter
Select
Gates
Write All / Write
Selected
Note: Follow the same procedure for all COMPlogic modules.
Click on 3I/1O Truth Table tab to view all available setting options.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
143
USER INTERAFCE
Display Interface
The Display is used an operator interface to view/edit the Relay
settings and can also be used for metering, monitoring and
control of the Relay. The Display acts as a mediator between the
Relay and the MCOMP Suite on PC with the help of USB cable.
Figure 9-1 : Display shows the Display and Table 9 2 shows the
Display element description. For Display overview and connection
details refer Installation chapter.
Figure 9-1: Display
Element
Function
1
Communication/ Power LED
Green when the Display is powered ON and red when it is fetching/processing data
from/to the Relay.
2
Drive Status LED
Same as Drive Status LED of the Relay.
3
Alarm/Pickup LED
Same as Alarm/Pickup LED of the Relay.
4
Trip LED
Same as Trip LED of the Relay.
5
Reset Key
Resets the Trip status of the Relay.
6
Return Key
Move into the previous level within a menu or a function.
7
Enter Key
Move into the next level within a menu or a function.
8
USB front port
Connect to a PC for configuring the Relay through the MCOMP Suite.
9
Navigation Keys
Move the menu, Setting value increase/decrease.
10
OLED Display
OLED Display for monitoring the readings, viewing settings and records.
Label
Table 9-2: Display Element Description
Operation Guide
Power on the Display as discussed in Installation chapter.
After Power On, the following screen appears with PWR/COMM
LED showing green color.
healthy between the Display and the Relay then following screen
will appear. It is the default screen of the Display.
Ir : 0.0A
Iy : 0.0A
Ib : 0.0A
Iavg : 0.0A
Ver X.XX
Note: The values of measurement shown in the above screen are for
representational purpose only. The Display will show the actual values
measured by the Relay.
When the Display is not connected to the Relay then it will
continue to show the above screen. When communication is
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
144
USER INTERAFCE
Press ENT key to get Menu screen shown below. It has six icons.
User can navigate to the desired icon by using UP/DOWN keys.
Metering
Metering
To view metering parameters, select METERING icon from the
icon screen using the navigation arrow keys.
Metering
Icon
Description
Metering: View all metering
parameters.
Press ENT key to view Metering parameters. Press UP/DOWN
navigation key for viewing various metering parameters.
Settings: View / Edit all setting
parameters.
Metering
View Record: View details of trip
and event records.
Ir
: 0.0A
Commands: Issue commands to
the Relay.
Iy
: 0.0A
Display: Change Display related
settings like contrast, language etc,.
Ib
: 0.0A
Connect To PC: The Display enters
in the PC connection mode where
user can configure the Relay with
the MCOMP Suite through the
Display.
Table 9-3: Display icon description
Table 9 4 lists all parameters notation displayed in metering screen:
Parameter
Notation on the Display
Line current values
Ir, Iy, Ib
Earth fault current
Io
Percentage Current-Unbalance
% IUB
Average current value
Iavg
Line, Phase voltage values
Vry, Vyb, Vbr, Vr, Vy, Vb
Average voltage value
Vavg
Frequency
Freq
All types of total power consumption
kW, KVAr, KVA
Active Energy
KWh
Power Factor
PF
CM Type
CM Type
Thermal Capacity Level
TherC
PTC Resistance
PTC Res
Phase sequence
PhSeq
Motor starting time
Tstart
Temperature
Temp
No of stops
No Stps
Motor run hrs
Hr Run
Total Motor Run hrs
T Hr Run
Starting Peak Current
StrPkI
Digital Input/Output Status
Digital I/O
Table 9-4 : Display metering Notations
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
145
USER INTERAFCE
Settings
System Settings
To view/edit settings of the Relay, select Settings icon in the menu
screen.
Select System from the Settings menu and press ENT key to enter
in to system settings.
Settings
Settings
Full load Current
Motor Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
The Display settings can be viewed in edit able mode or non-edit
able mode. If the user presses ENT key on menu screen after
selecting Settings icon, the Display will prompt to select the
mode. The Display shows two options as follows:
Settings
To set the each system setting parameter, follow the procedure
given in Relay Con guration through the Display.
Protection Settings
Select Protection from the Settings menu and press ENT key.
Edit
View
Settings
System
In Edit mode, user can edit or change the setting parameters and
apply the same in the Relay. In View mode, user can only view the
setting parameters currently stored in the Relay.
On the selection of Edit mode, the Display will prompt for a four
digit password for authenticity. Valid password range is from
0000 to 9999.
PASSWORD
Protection
Digital I/O
The list of Protections will be displayed. Use UP/DOWN arrow
keys to navigate to all other Protections.
Select the required parameter by pressing UP/DOWN key and
press ENT key to change the settings.
X X X X
Protection
To enter password, use UP/DOWN arrow to select the digit. Press
ENT key to save the current digit and to move to the next digit.
Repeat the same procedure for other digits.
Once the correct password is entered, Settings screen will be
displayed as shown below:
Overload
Locked Rotor
Phase Reversal
Press ENT key to enter the Overload Settings.
Settings
Overload
System
Protection
Iset
: 100.0% I c
Digital I/O
Al Set
: 95.0% Tm
ThMem
: Enable
The Settings screen consists of four con guration les, which can
be viewed and/or edited.
1. System
To set the each protection parameter, follow the procedure given
in Relay Con guration through the Display.
2. Protection
3. Digital I/O
4. Communication
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
146
USER INTERAFCE
Digital I/O Settings
Select Digital I/O from the settings menu and press ENT key.
Settings
System
Note: Type eld is not editable through the Display and it is xed as per
hardware con guration.
To set communication parameters, follow the procedure given in
Relay Con guration through the Display.
Protection
View Records
Digital I/O
Press ENT key to con gure respective Digital I/O and analog
output.
To view trip/event records of the Relay, select View Records icon
by navigating in the main menu screen using up/down arrows.
VIEW RECORDS
Digital I/O
Digital I/P1
Digital I/P2
Digital I/P3
Select the required input by pressing UP/DOWN key and press
ENT key to con gure the settings.
Digital I/P 1
Type
: None
T Valid
: 0.10 Sec
Press ENT key to enter into records screen. User can view two
types of records:
View Records
Trip
Event
Trip records
To set any digital input/output and analog output, follow the
procedure given in Relay Con guration through the Display.
At any given time, maximum ve Trip records can be stored in First
In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view trip records.
Trip
Communication Settings
Select Communication from the settings menu and press ENT
key.
Settings
Protection
Trip Counter
Trip Record 1
Trip Record 2
Following parameters are available in Trip records:
Digital I/O
Trip cause
Communication
Date
Press ENT key to con gure respective communication protocol
depending on the Relay hardware con guration.
Time
Currents (Ir, Iy, IB, Ie)
Voltages (Vr, Vy, Vb)
Modbus communication settings:
Communication
Type
: Modbus
Mode
: RTU
Node
:1
Frequency
Temperature
PTC resistance
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Trip Record 1.
Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all
trip record parameters.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
147
USER INTERAFCE
Trip Record 1
11/11/2010
of the Display. Select COMMANDS icon to from main Menu
screen and press ENT key to enter in to command menu.
COMMANDS
11:55:10:600
Ir
: 10.0A
Note: Follow the same procedure for other Trip records.
Note that Trip records will only be displayed if Trip counter is not zero.
If Trip record value is say one, then only one record will be displayed on
screen and maximum of ve records can be viewed from the Display
even Trip counter value greater than ve.
After pressing ENT key, the Display will prompt for password.
Enter the valid password to access various commands. For
procedure to enter password refer Relay Con guration through
the Display in Settings chapter.
Press ENT key to view Commands. Press UP/DOWN keys for
other commands.
Event Records
At any given time, maximum ve Event records can be stored in
First In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view event
records.
Commands
Motor Start 2
Motor Stop
Event
MCOMP Reset
Event Counter
Event Counter 1
Event Counter 2
Select the command to be given to the Relay and press ENT key to
send command to the Relay. A message saying CMD SENT will be
displayed on successful operation.
Commands
Event source (alarm or pickup)
Motor Start 2
CMD Sent
Motor Stop
Date
MCOMP Reset
Following parameters are available in Event records:
Time
Event cause
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Event Record 1.
Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all
event record parameters.
Display Settings
Select the Display icon on the main menu screen to change the
Display settings and press ENT key to enter into Display menu.
DISPLAY
Event Record 1
Fault
: PickUp
11/11/2010
11:55:10:600
Press ENT key to edit the Display parameters.
Follow the same procedure for other Event records.
Note that Trip records will only be displayed if event counter is not
zero. If event record value is say one, then only one record will be
displayed on screen and maximum of ve records can be viewed from
the Display even event counter value greater than ve.
Display
Language
Logo Display
Contrast Value
Commands
Commands can be sent to the Relay from the Commands menu
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
148
USER INTERAFCE
The Display setting consists of
viewed and/or edited:
ve parameters, which can be
Language
Press ENT key to select YES and to enter into PC mode. The
following screen will appear once the Display is connected to
computer.
Con g Mode
Logo display
Contrast value
Power save
Rolling display
Connect to PC
Press return key to end this mode, the Display will prompt for
con rmation as follows:
In this mode, the Relay can be connected to the MCOMP Suite
through USB port of the Display.
To enter in this mode, connect USB cable from front port available
on the Display to computer's USB port.
Disconnect ?
YES
NO
Select the CONNECT TO PC icon on the main menu screen and
press ENT key to enter in to Connect to PC menu.
CONNECT TO PC
Select YES to end the PC mode.
Press ENT key, the Display will prompt for con rmation as shown
below.
CONNECT TO PC ?
YES
NO
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
149
TESTING AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
150
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Overview
This section allows the user to acknowledge and troubleshoot any
problems encountered during testing and commissioning of the
Relay.
A complete functional check and calibration has been performed
for each unit before it is shipped to ensure that the relay is fully
functional. For testing and troubleshooting the relay at site, the
reference data provided herein helps the user to check if the relay
is functioning as per the desired speci cation and is properly
connected in the motor feeder for the control inputs and outputs.
Testing
The procedure described in this section helps the user to enter
settings into the relay, verify the relay connection and tests the
functional behavior of the relay. It is not necessary to test every
function of the relay to verify the relay s behavior. Brief functional
tests ensure that the relay is operational as per the settings done
in the relay.
For balanced system, set the equal magnitude of all the 3 phases
(current and voltage) with balanced angles in the test kit & apply
to the relay making balanced system. The applied values should
be greater than 10% of the set IFLC and VN values. Observe the
current and voltage magnitude & compare with the expected
metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled).
Earth fault current, Current Unbalance in metering should be
zero.
For unbalance system, set the different magnitude & angles for
the all the 3 phases (current and voltage) in the test kit & apply to
the relay making the system unbalanced. Observe the current and
voltage magnitude of all phases and compare with the expected
metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled).
Power, Energy & Power factor:
a. Connect both current as well as voltage source to the relay.
b. Set the magnitude of the voltage and current as per the
requirement of the system.
c. Observe the Active, Reactive and Apparent Power/Energy
metering values with the expected values by taking CT & PT
ratio into consideration.
Connection Setup Requirement
Apart from the relay main unit, CM unit and connecting cables,
the 3 phase power source like Omicron, Freza, Doble is required
to test the relay.
d. Observe Power factor & compare with the expected result.
Protection Testing
Metering testing
Phase current and voltage:
Connect the MCOMP CM unit with the base unit with the prefabricated CM cable provided with the current module unit. Pass
R-Y-B phase current cables of current source i.e. testing kit
through the R-Y-B pass through holes of MCOMP current module
opening and short them with neutral of the test kit. Wire 3 phase
voltages with neutral to the voltage terminal present on the
MCOMP base unit (assuming it is 3P-4W system).
The protection testing of the relay can be performed on the same
setup used for metering testing. The basic protection elements
needs to be enabled and set as per the requirement and after
injecting the proper values, the protection tripping can be
checked. The drive status should be as running status for the relay
to give the protection trip command after detecting the fault.
Below example shows the protection testing in case of thermal
overload.
Settings
Applied Input
Expected Result
IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type)
Inject the current
Trip in 10.4 sec
ISET = 100% IFLC
IR, IY, IB = 6 A
Observed Result
Trip class = 10
IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type)
Inject the current
ISET = 100% IFLC
IR, IY, IB = 3 A
Trip in 42.6 sec
Trip class = 10
Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
151
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing
Problem
Possible Causes
Diagnosis
If any DI configured as STOP
is low.
If any DI configured as
INTERLOCK STOP is low.
Motor not
starting due to
Inhibit condition.
Thermal Capacity is beyond
the set threshold limit.
Unhealthy 3-phase voltage
(if Voltage Connection is enabled).
Check Inhibit Status through Special commands in MCOMP
Suite or Commands in the Display menu.
Make the system healthy by removing the Inhibit condition(s).
The relay will not allow to start the motor if inhibit condition
is present. If the motor has been started externally, the relay
will not protect the motor as it is in inhibit condition.
Motor is in trip condition.
Maximum number of starts
exceeds the set permissive limit
within the set reference period.
Motor is in
healthy condition
(No Inhibit) but
not starting.
The Start Matrix is configured
improperly in Starter Settings.
Improper DO configuration.
If any DI configured as
STOP is low.
If any DI configured as
CONTACTOR FEEDBACK is low.
Motor is stopping.
If any DI configured as
MAINTAINED START is low.
If any DI configured as
INTERLOCK STOP is low.
Check Modes of Starting Matrix in Starter Settings using the
MCOMP Suite or the Display.
Check DO configuration in IO Settings as per Starter Settings.
For DOL - ensure RUN output selection.
For RDOL - ensure FORWARD RELAY and REVERSE RELAY selection.
For STAR-DELTA - ensure STAR, DELTA and MAIN selection.
Check the cause for the motor stop through special commands
in the MCOMP Suite or commands in the Display menu.
Check physical wiring.
Ensure that the contactor is picking up.
Set sufficient validation time for the DI in IO settings.
If Current Auto Stop is enabled
and all 3-phase currents are less
than 10%.
Full load current setting is not
as per the range of the Relay
CM type.
The Relay does
not measure/
display accurate
values of voltages
and currents.
3-phase system selection is
improper.
Ensure if proper CM type is connected and verify if the CM
type is displayed in Monitoring mode of the MCOMP Suite or
Metering menu in the Display. Set proper Full load current (IFLC)
and rated voltage in system settings as per the motor rating.
Check for 3-phase 3-wire or 3- phase 4-wire system selection in
system settings.
Wiring error.
Check wiring and connection as per the drawing schematics.
Incompatibility between the Relay
and Display firmware.
Consult the Relay manufacturer.
Table 10-2 (1): Troubleshooting conditions
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
152
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The Relay is not
responding to a
fault.
Diagnosis
Possible Causes
Improper test source settings.
(in case of manual testing of
the Relay)
Improper wiring.
Ensure the alarm and trip selection is done in the Protection
Settings for the required fault.
Ensure proper settings in the test source. Also, verify if current
injection is as per the CM range.
Check the wiring and connections.
Ensure if new settings are saved.
The Relay is not
behaving as per
new settings.
New settings are not saved.
If settings are done through the Display or through the
MCOMP Suite (in supervisor or user mode), ensure that the
Relay is power recycled after saving the settings.
Table 10-2 (2): Troubleshooting conditions
Special Commands
Table 10 3 shows a list of Special Commands.
Sr No.
Commands
Description
1
Plug in check
Shows whether the Relay is connected to the MCOMP Suite or not.
2
MCOMP Status
Shows the status for running motor, trip, inhibit, etc,.
3
Status of EEPROM read
Shows the status of EEPROM for read operation.
4
Status of EEPROM Write
Shows the status of EEPROM for write operation.
5
Status of the MCOMP file system
Shows the status of setting files and internal file systems.
6
Capture starting curve
Used to store the last starting curve, so as to compare the plots in the future.
7
Inhibit Status
Shows all possible active causes of inhibit status.
8
Motor stop cause
Shows all possible active causes for motor stop.
9
Read time from MCOMP
Shows the time setting present in the Relay
10
Write PC time to MCOMP
Sets the PC date and time in to the Relay
11
Clear Thermal memory
Clears the thermal content stored in the Relay
12
Clear Energy values
Clears all the Energy values stored in the Relay
13
Reset Number Start Command
Clears number of starts stored in the Relay
14
Reset Number Stops Command
Clears number of stops stored in the Relay
15
Reset Trip Counter Command
Clears number of trips stored in the Relay
16
Reset Event Record Counter Command
Clears number of events stored in the Relay
17
Reset Motor Run Hours Command
Clears the motor run hours value stored in the Relay
18
Reset Total Motor Run Hours Command
Clears the Total motor run hours value stored in the Relay
Table 10-3: Special Commands
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
153
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Inhibit Status
Table 10 4 shows a list of all possible inhibit causes shown by the Relay.
Sr No.
Commands
Description
1
No Voltage
The Relay senses voltage in all 3-phases < 10%.
2
Under Voltage
The Relay senses an under-voltage pick-up condition.
3
Trip
The Relay is in trip mode.
4
Thermal Capacity
Thermal capacity > Set threshold limit.
5
Max. No. of starts
No. of starts > Set permissible limit in the set reference period.
6
No Stop Input
DI configured as STOP is low.
7
Interlock 1
8
Interlock 2
9
Interlock 3
10
Interlock 4
11
Interlock 5
12
Interlock 6
13
Interlock 7
14
Interlock 8
15
Interlock 9
16
Interlock 10
17
Interlock 11
18
Interlock 12
19
Communication Stop
DI configured as INTERLOCK STOP is low.
Stop from communication is high
Table 10-4: Inhibit Status
Motor Stop Cause
Table 10 5 shows a list of all possible Motor stop causes shown
by the Relay.
Sr No.
Commands
1
Motor stopped through trip.
2
Motor stopped through the HMI/Display stop command.
3
Motor stopped through the digital input: Stop.
4
Motor stopped through the Digital Input: EStop.
5
Motor stopped through the communication stop command.
6
Motor stopped through the Interlock 1 configured as Stop.
7
Motor stopped through the Interlock 2 configured as Stop.
8
Motor stopped through the Interlock 3 configured as Stop.
9
Motor stopped through the Interlock 4 configured as Stop.
10
Motor stopped through the Interlock 5 configured as Stop.
11
Motor stopped through the Interlock 6 configured as Stop.
12
Motor stopped through the Interlock 7 configured as Stop.
13
Motor stopped through the Interlock 8 configured as Stop.
Table 10-5 (1): Motor Stop Cause
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
154
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Sr No.
Commands
14
Motor stopped through the Interlock 9 configured as Stop.
15
Motor stopped through the Interlock 10 configured as Stop.
16
Motor stopped through the Interlock 11 configured as Stop.
17
Motor stopped through the Interlock 12 configured as Stop.
18
Motor stopped through the Contactor Feedback 1 input.
19
Motor stopped through Contactor Feedback 2 input.
20
Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no voltage.
21
Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no current.
22
Motor stopped as Start1 DI not maintained.
23
Motor stopped as Start2 DI not maintained.
24
Motor stopped as Start3 DI not maintained.
25
Motor stopped as Start4 DI not maintained.
Table 10-5 (2): Motor Stop Cause
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
155
ANNEXURE
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
156
ANNEXURE A - MEMORY MAPS
Overview
The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus
serial, Pro bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for
all these communication protocols is described below.
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map
trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status.
Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the
memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the
addresses for slow scan parameters. The addresses for fast scan
parameters will range from 30001 to 30016 and cannot be
changed. Different parameters can be con gured as fast scan
parameters at these addresses through MCOMP Suite.
Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters,
Settings
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
Notes
Input Register (Function code : 0x04)
Metering Data
Instantaneous RMS Current
R Phase Current
31001
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
31002
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
31003
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Earth Current
31004
0
60000
0.1
A
2
SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4A
SF=0.01 for IFLC < 20A
SF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC
4A
SF = 10 for IFLC
20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC
80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
One Second RMS Average Current
R Phase Current
31005
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
31006
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
31007
0
60000
0.1
A
2
SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4A
SF=0.01 for IFLC < 20A
SF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A
Earth Current
31008
0
60000
1
mA
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC
4A
SF = 10 for IFLC
20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC
80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
Average RMS
Phase Current
31009
0
60000
1
mA
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC
4A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC
20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Instantaneous RMS Phase Voltage
R Phase Current
31010
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Y Phase Current
31011
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Table A-1 (1): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
157
MEMORY MAPS
Settings
B Phase Current
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
Notes
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
31012
0
Line Voltage
R-Y Line Voltage
31013
0
6500
0.1
V
2
-
Y-B Line Voltage
31014
0
6500
0.1
V
2
-
B-R Line Voltage
31015
0
6500
0.1
V
2
-
One Second RMS Average Voltage
R Phase Voltage
31016
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Y Phase Voltage
31017
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
B Phase Voltage
31018
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Average RMS
Phase Voltage
31019
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Phase wise Active Power
R Phase
Active Power
31020
0
210000000
1
W
4
MSW = 31021
LSW = 31020
Y Phase
Active Power
31022
0
210000000
1
W
4
MSW = 31023
LSW = 31022
B Phase
Active Power
31024
0
210000000
1
W
4
MSW = 31025
LSW = 31024
Phase wise Reactive Power
R Phase
Reactive Power
31026
0
210000000
1
VAR
4
MSW = 31027
LSW = 31026
Y Phase
Reactive Power
31028
0
210000000
1
VAR
4
MSW = 31029
LSW = 31028
B Phase
Reactive Power
31030
0
210000000
1
VAR
4
MSW = 31031
LSW = 31030
Phase wise Apparent Power
R Phase
Apparent Power
31032
0
210000000
1
VA
4
MSW = 31033
LSW = 31032
Y Phase
Apparent Power
31034
0
210000000
1
VA
4
MSW = 31035
LSW = 31034
B Phase
Apparent Power
31036
0
210000000
1
VA
4
MSW = 31037
LSW = 31036
Total Power
Total Active
Power
31038
0
210000000
1
W
4
MSW = 31039
LSW = 31038
Total Reactive
Power
31040
0
210000000
1
VAR
4
MSW = 31041
LSW = 31040
Total Apparent
Power
31042
0
210000000
1
VA
4
MSW = 31043
LSW = 31042
Table A-1 (2): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
158
MEMORY MAPS
Settings
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
Notes
Energy
Total Active
Energy
31044
0
1.65564E+17 1/3600
Wh
8
MSW = 31039
LSW = 31038
Total Reactive
Energy
31048
0
1.65564E+17 1/3600
VARh
8
MSW = 31041
LSW = 31040
Total Apparent
Energy
31052
0
1.65564E+17 1/3600
VAh
8
MSW = 31043
LSW = 31042
Other Data
-
Value = 0 for 1-2-3
(R-Y-B)
Phase Sequence
31056
0
1
-
Temperature
31057
0
2000
0.1
0
C
2
-
Frequency
31059
0
1000
0.1
Hz
2
-
Starting Time
31059
0
10000
0.1
Sec
2
-
Starting Peak
Current
31060
0
60000
0.1
A
2
-
Thermal
Capacity
31061
0
10000
0.1
%
4
MSW = 31062
LSW = 31061
2
Value = 1 for 1-3-2
(R-B-Y)
CM Detect
Number
31063
0
5
1
-
2
0 = CM TYPE 1
1 = CM TYPE 2
2 = CM TYPE 3
3 = CM TYPE 4
4 = CM TYPE 5
5 = INTERNAL CM
Reserved
31064
0
1000
0.001
-
2
-
Motor Operation
Number Of
Starts
31068
0
4294967296
1
-
4
MSW = 31069
LSW = 31068
Number Of
Hours Motor Run
31070
0
65535
1/60
Minutes
2
-
Total Number Of
Hours Motor Run
31071
0
4294967296
1/60
Minutes
4
MSW = 31072
LSW = 31071
Last Start Amps
31073
0
60000
0.1
A
2
-
Number Of Stops
31074
0
4294967296
1
-
4
MSW = 31075
LSW = 31074
DI Status
31076
Digital Input 1
Status
31076.0
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low input
Value = 1 for high input
Digital Input 2
Status
31076.1
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low input
Value = 1 for high input
Digital Input 3
Status
31076.2
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low input
Value = 1 for high input
2
Table A-1 (3): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
159
MEMORY MAPS
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low input
Value = 1 for high input
31076.4
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low input
Value = 1 for high input
Digital Input 6
Status
31076.5
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low input
Value = 1 for high input
Reserved
31076.6
To
31076.15
-
-
-
-
-
Reserved
DO Status
31077
Digital Output 1
Status
31077.0
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low Output
Value = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 2
Status
31077.1
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low Output
Value = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 3
Status
31077.2
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low Output
Value = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 4
Status
31077.3
0
1
-
-
-
Value = 0 for low Output
Value = 1 for high Output
Reserved
31077.4
To
31077.15
-
-
-
-
-
Reserved
Flags
31078
Temp. Sensor
Type
31078.0,
31078.1
0
3
-
-
-
0 = RTD Protection Enabled
1 = PTC Protection Enabled
2 = Both RTD & PTC
Protections disabled
System selection
31078.2
0
1
-
-
-
0 = 3Ph-4W System
1 = 3Ph-3W System
Voltage Connect Flag
31078.3
0
1
-
-
-
0 = Voltage Connect Disabled
1 = Voltage Connect Enabled
% Current Unbalance
31079
0
10
0.1
%
2
-
Logic Status
31080
Contactor A
31080.0
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Start command from
Contactor A
0 = Motor Off (Not running)
Contactor B
31080.1
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Start command from
Contactor B
0 = Motor Off (Not running)
Local/Remote
31080.2
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Remote
0 = Local
DCS Start
Available
31080.3
0
1
-
-
-
1 = DCS Start Available
0 = DCS Start NOT Available
Drive Start
Available
31080.4
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Drive Available
0 = Drive NOT Available
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
Digital Input 4
Status
31076.3
Digital Input 5
Status
Settings
Notes
2
2
2
Table A-1 (4): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
160
MEMORY MAPS
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Drive Running
0 = Drive NOT Running
31080.6
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Alarm
0 = No Alarm
Fault
31080.7
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Fault (Trip)
0 = No Fault (Trip)
RESERVED
31080.8
to
31080.15
0
1
-
-
-
-
Watchdog Register
31081
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trip Records
32000
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
Drive Running
31080.5
Alarm
Settings
Trip Record
Notes
1
Trip Cause
32001
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 32002
LSW = 32001
Refer Trip Record Table
Date Format
32003
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Trip Record Table
Time Format
32004
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32005
LSW = 32004
Refer Trip Record Table
R Phase Current
32006
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
32007
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
32008
0
60000
0.1
A
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
EF Current
32009
0
60000
1
mA
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage
32010
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Y Phase Voltage
32011
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
B Phase Voltage
32012
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Frequency
32013
0
1000
0.1
Hz
2
-
0
2000
0.1
0
RTD Temperature
32014
PTC Resistance
If RTD temperature is enabled,
Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
C
2
0
2000
1
Ω
If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperature
parameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
Table A-1 (5): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
161
MEMORY MAPS
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
0
1000
0.001
-
2
-
10
1000
1
-
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
Power Factor
32015
Current Scale Factor
32016
Settings
Earth Current
Scale Factor
Temp. Sensor
Type
32017
1
1000
32018.0
0
2
1
-
-
-
32018.1
2
System
Selection flag
32018.2
0
1
-
-
Voltage Connect
Flag
32018.3
0
1
-
-
Trip Record
Notes
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Protection
2 = RTD & PTC
Temperature Protection
Disabled
0 = 3Ph-4W System
0 = 3Ph-3W System
0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
2
Trip Cause
32019
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 32020
LSW = 32019
Refer Trip Record Table
Date Format
32021
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Trip Record Table
Time Format
32022
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32023
LSW = 32022
Refer Trip Record Table
R Phase Current
32024
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
32025
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
32026
0
60000
0.1
A
2
EF Current
32027
0
60000
1
mA
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
Table A-1 (6): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
162
MEMORY MAPS
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
32029
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
B Phase Voltage
32030
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Frequency
32031
0
1000
0.1
Hz
2
-
0
2000
0.1
0
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
R Phase Voltage
32028
Y Phase Voltage
Settings
RTD Temperature
C
32032
PTC Resistance
2
0
2000
1
Ω
Notes
If RTD temperature is enabled,
Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperature
parameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
Power Factor
32033
0
1000
0.001
-
2
-
Current Scale Factor
32034
10
1000
1
-
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Earth Current
Scale Factor
Temp. Sensor
Type
32035
1
1000
32036.0
1
-
0
2
-
-
2
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Protection
2 = RTD & PTC
Temperature Protection
Disabled
32036.1
2
System
Selection flag
32036.2
0
1
-
-
Voltage Connect
Flag
32036.3
0
1
-
-
Trip Record
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0 = 3Ph-4W System
0 = 3Ph-3W System
0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
3
Trip Cause
32037
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 32038
LSW = 32037
Refer Trip Record Table
Date Format
32039
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Trip Record Table
Time Format
32040
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32041
LSW = 32040
Refer Trip Record Table
Table A-1 (7): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
163
MEMORY MAPS
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
32043
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
32044
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
R Phase Current
32042
Settings
Notes
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
EF Current
32045
0
60000
1
mA
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage
32046
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Y Phase Voltage
32047
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
B Phase Voltage
32048
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Frequency
32049
0
1000
0.1
Hz
2
-
0
2000
0.1
0
RTD Temperature
32050
PTC Resistance
If RTD temperature is enabled,
Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
C
0
1000
1
Ω
2
If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperature
parameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
Power Factor
32051
0
1000
0.001
-
2
-
Current Scale Factor
32052
10
1000
1
-
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
Earth Current
Scale Factor
Temp. Sensor
Type
System
Selection flag
32053
1
1000
32054.0
1
-
0
2
-
-
0
1
-
-
32054.1
32054.2
2
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Protection
2 = RTD & PTC
Temperature Protection
Disabled
0 = 3Ph-4W System
0 = 3Ph-3W System
Table A-1 (8): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
164
MEMORY MAPS
Settings
Voltage Connect
Flag
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
1
-
-
Range of data
Modbus
Address
Min
32054.3
0
Trip Record
Size
in
Bytes
Notes
2
0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
4
Trip Cause
32055
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 32056
LSW = 32055
Refer Trip Record Table
Date Format
32057
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Trip Record Table
Time Format
32058
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32059
LSW = 32058
Refer Trip Record Table
R Phase Current
32060
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
32061
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
32062
0
60000
0.1
A
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
EF Current
32063
0
60000
1
mA
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage
32064
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Y Phase Voltage
32065
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
B Phase Voltage
32066
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Frequency
32067
0
1000
0.1
Hz
2
-
0
2000
0.1
0
RTD Temperature
32068
PTC Resistance
If RTD temperature is enabled,
Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
C
0
1000
1
Ω
2
If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperature
parameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
Power Factor
32069
0
1000
0.001
-
2
-
Current Scale Factor
32070
10
1000
1
-
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Table A-1 (9): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
165
MEMORY MAPS
Settings
Modbus
Address
Earth Current
Scale Factor
Temp. Sensor
Type
32071
Range of data
Min
1
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
1000
32072.0
1
Unit
-
0
2
-
-
Size
in
Bytes
2
32072.2
0
1
-
-
Voltage Connect
Flag
32072.3
0
1
-
-
Trip Record
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Protection
2 = RTD & PTC
Temperature Protection
Disabled
32072.1
System
Selection flag
Notes
2
0 = 3Ph-4W System
0 = 3Ph-3W System
0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
5
Trip Cause
32073
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 32074
LSW = 32073
Refer Trip Record Table
Date Format
32075
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Trip Record Table
Time Format
32076
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32077
LSW = 32076
Refer Trip Record Table
R Phase Current
32078
0
60000
0.1
A
2
Y Phase Current
32079
0
60000
0.1
A
2
B Phase Current
32080
0
60000
0.1
A
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
EF Current
32081
0
60000
1
mA
2
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage
32082
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Y Phase Voltage
32083
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
B Phase Voltage
32084
0
3500
0.1
V
2
-
Frequency
32085
0
1000
0.1
Hz
2
-
Table A-1 (10): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
166
MEMORY MAPS
Settings
Modbus
Address
RTD Temperature
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
0
2000
0.1
Range of data
Unit
0
0
1000
1
Ω
Notes
If RTD temperature is enabled,
Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
C
32086
PTC Resistance
Size
in
Bytes
2
If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperature
parameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
Power Factor
32087
0
1000
0.001
-
2
-
Current Scale Factor
32088
10
1000
1
-
2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Earth Current
Scale Factor
32089
1
1000
1
-
2
Temp. Sensor
Type
Type: Vector Sum
==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0
2
-
-
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Protection
2 = RTD & PTC
Temperature Protection
Disabled
0 = 3Ph-4W System
0 = 3Ph-3W System
32090.0
32090.1
System
Selection flag
32090.2
0
1
-
-
Voltage Connect
Flag
32090.3
0
1
-
-
Trip counter
32091
0
4294967296
-
-
Event Records
33001
EVENT Record
2
0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
4
MSW = 32092
LSW = 32091
1
Event Source
33001
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 33002
LSW = 33001
Refer Event Record
Table
Event Cause
33003
0
3
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Date Format
33004
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Time Format
33005
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32006
LSW = 32005
Refer Event Record Table
Table A-1 (11): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
167
MEMORY MAPS
Settings
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
EVENT Record
Unit
Size
in
Bytes
Notes
2
Event Source
33007
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 33008
LSW = 33007
Refer Event Record
Table
Event Cause
33009
0
3
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Date Format
33010
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Time Format
33011
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32012
LSW = 32011
Refer Event Record Table
EVENT Record
3
Event Source
33013
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 33014
LSW = 33013
Refer Event Record
Table
Event Cause
33015
0
3
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Date Format
33016
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Time Format
33017
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32018
LSW = 32017
Refer Event Record Table
EVENT Record
4
Event Source
33019
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 33020
LSW = 33019
Refer Event Record
Table
Event Cause
33021
0
3
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Date Format
33022
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Time Format
33023
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32024
LSW = 32023
Refer Event Record Table
EVENT Record
5
Event Source
33025
0
1048575
-
-
4
MSW = 33026
LSW = 33025
Refer Event Record
Table
Event Cause
33027
0
3
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Date Format
33028
0
65535
-
-
2
Refer Event Record Table
Time Format
33029
0
134217727
-
-
4
MSW = 32030
LSW = 32029
Refer Event Record Table
Event Counter
33031
0
4294967296
-
-
4
MSW = 33032
LSW = 33031
Table A-1 (12): Modbus Memory Map
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
168
MEMORY MAPS
Event Source
The Relay stores last ve trip records in its non-volatile memory.
The memory addressing format for date, time and trip cause is
shown in Table A 1. Bits in register are assigned unique fault
cause. When the motor trips, the corresponding fault bit(s) will be
set high and rest all other fault bits remain low. In healthy
condition all bits will be in reset condition. The date and time of
fault will be stored in its corresponding address.
Trip Records
Trip
Record 1
Trip
Record 2
Trip
Record 3
Trip
Record 4
Trip
Record 5
Example for
Fast Scan; if
address
configured as
MSW=32002
MSW=32020
MSW=32038
MSW=32056
MSW=32074
MSW=32012
LSW=32001
LSW=32019
LSW=32037
LSW=32055
LSW=32073
LSW=32011
Overload
32001.0
32019.0
32037.0
32055.0
32073.0
32011.0
Locked Rotor
32001.1
32019.1
32037.1
32055.1
32073.1
32011.1
Earth Fault
32001.2
32019.2
32037.2
32055.2
32073.2
32011.2
Under current
32001.3
32019.3
32037.3
32055.3
32073.3
32011.3
Current
Unbalance
32001.4
32019.4
32037.4
32055.4
32073.4
32011.4
Over Voltage
32001.5
32019.5
32037.5
32055.5
32073.5
32011.5
Under Voltage
32001.6
32019.6
32037.6
32055.6
32073.6
32011.6
Voltage
Unbalance
32001.7
32019.7
32037.7
32055.7
32073.7
32011.7
RTD Temperature
32001.8
32019.8
32037.8
32055.8
32073.8
32011.8
Over
Frequency
32001.9
32019.9
32037.9
32055.9
32073.9
32011.9
Under Frequency
32001.10
32019.10
32037.10
32055.10
32073.10
32011.10
Phase Loss
32001.11
32019.11
32037.11
32055.11
32073.11
32011.11
Phase Reversal
32001.12
32019.12
32037.12
32055.12
32073.12
32011.12
Excessive
Start Time
32001.13
32019.13
32037.13
32055.13
32073.13
32011.13
Successive Start
32001.14
32019.14
32037.14
32055.14
32073.14
32011.14
Interlock-1
32001.15
32019.15
32037.15
32055.15
32073.15
32011.15
MSW=32002
MSW=32020
MSW=32038
MSW=32056
MSW=32074
MSW=32012
LSW=32001
LSW=32019
LSW=32037
LSW=32055
LSW=32073
LSW=32011
Interlock-2
32002.0
32020.0
32038.0
32056.0
32074.0
32012.0
Interlock-3
32002.1
32020.1
32038.1
32056.1
32074.1
32012.1
Fail to Stop
32002.2
32020.2
32038.2
32056.2
32074.2
32012.2
Over Current
32002.3
32020.3
32038.3
32056.3
32074.3
32012.3
PTC Response
Resistance
32002.4
32020.4
32038.4
32056.4
32074.4
32012.4
Trip Cause
........
........
Table A-2 (1): Trip Record Cause Table
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
169
MEMORY MAPS
Trip Records
Trip
Record 1
Trip
Record 2
Trip
Record 3
Trip
Record 4
Trip
Record 5
Example for
Fast Scan; if
address
configured as
PTC Short
Circuit
32002.5
32020.5
32038.5
32056.5
32074.5
32012.5
PTC Open
Circuit
32002.6
32020.6
32038.6
32056.6
32074.6
32012.6
Interlock 4
32002.7
32020.7
32038.7
32056.7
32074.7
32012.7
Interlock 5
32002.8
32020.8
32038.8
32056.8
32074.8
32012.8
Interlock 6
32002.9
32020.9
32038.9
32056.9
32074.9
32012.9
Interlock 7
32002.10
32020.10
32038.10
32056.10
32074.10
32012.10
Interlock 8
32002.11
32020.11
32038.11
32056.11
32074.11
32012.11
Interlock 9
32002.12
32020.12
32038.12
32056.12
32074.12
32012.12
Interlock 10
32002.13
32020.13
32038.13
32056.13
32074.13
32012.13
Interlock 11
32002.14
32020.14
32038.14
32056.14
32074.14
32012.14
Interlock 12
32002.15
32020.15
32038.15
32056.15
32074.15
32012.15
Trip Cause
Table A-2 (2): Trip Record Cause Table
Trip Records
Trip
Record 1
Trip
Record 2
Trip
Record 3
Trip
Record 4
Trip
Record 5
Address
Date Format
Day
32003
32021
32039
32057
32075
32003.0
32021.0
32039.0
32057.0
32075.0
32003.1
32021.1
32039.1
32057.1
32075.1
32003.2
32021.2
32039.2
32057.2
32075.2
32003.3
32021.3
32039.3
32057.3
32075.3
32003.4
32021.4
32039.4
32057.4
32075.4
32003.5
32021.5
32039.5
32057.5
32075.5
32003.6
32021.6
32039.6
32057.6
32075.6
32003.7
32021.7
32039.7
32057.7
32075.7
32003.8
32021.8
32039.8
32057.8
32075.8
32003.9
32021.9
32039.9
32057.9
32075.9
32003.10
32021.10
32039.10
32057.10
32075.10
32003.11
32021.11
32039.11
32057.11
32075.11
32003.12
32021.12
32039.12
32057.12
32075.12
32003.13
32021.13
32039.13
32057.13
32075.13
32003.14
32021.14
32039.14
32057.14
32075.14
32003.15
32021.15
32039.15
32057.15
32075.15
Month
Year
Table A-2 (3): Trip Record Cause Table
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
170
MEMORY MAPS
Trip Records
Trip
Record 1
Trip
Record 2
Trip
Record 3
Trip
Record 4
Trip
Record 5
MSW
LSW
32005
32004
32023
32022
32041
32040
32059
32058
32077
32076
32004.0
32022.0
32040.0
32058.0
32076.0
32004.1
32022.1
32040.1
32058.1
32076.1
32004.2
32022.2
32040.2
32058.2
32076.2
32004.3
32022.3
32040.3
32058.3
32076.3
32004.4
32022.4
32040.4
32058.4
32076.4
32004.5
32022.5
32040.5
32058.5
32076.5
32004.6
32022.6
32040.6
32058.6
32076.6
32004.7
32022.7
32040.7
32058.7
32076.7
32004.8
32022.8
32040.8
32058.8
32076.8
32004.9
32022.9
32040.9
32058.9
32076.9
32004.10
32022.10
32040.10
32058.10
32076.10
32004.11
32022.11
32040.11
32058.11
32076.11
32004.12
32022.12
32040.12
32058.12
32076.12
32004.13
32022.13
32040.13
32058.13
32076.13
32004.14
32022.14
32040.14
32058.14
32076.14
32004.15
32022.15
32040.15
32058.15
32076.15
32005.0
32023.0
32041.0
32059.0
32077.0
32005.1
32023.1
32041.1
32059.1
32077.1
32005.2
32023.2
32041.2
32059.2
32077.2
32005.3
32023.3
32041.3
32059.3
32077.3
32005.4
32023.4
32041.4
32059.4
32077.4
32005.5
32023.5
32041.5
32059.5
32077.5
32005.6
32023.6
32041.6
32059.6
32077.6
32005.7
32023.7
32041.7
32059.7
32077.7
32005.8
32023.8
32041.8
32059.8
32077.8
32005.9
32023.9
32041.9
32059.9
32077.9
32005.10
32023.10
32041.10
32059.10
32076.10
32005.11
32023.11
32041.11
32059.11
32077.11
32005.12
32023.12
32041.12
32059.12
32077.12
32005.13
32023.13
32041.13
32059.13
32077.13
32005.14
32023.14
32041.14
32059.14
32077.14
32005.15
32023.15
32041.15
32059.15
32077.15
Time Format
Hours
Minutes
Reserved
Seconds
Milliseconds
Table A-2 (4): Trip Record Cause Table
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
171
MEMORY MAPS
Event Record Table
The Relay stores last ve event records in its non-volatile memory.
The memory addressing format for date, time and event cause is
shown in Table A 3 Bits in register are assigned unique event
cause. In the occurrence of any pickup or alarm state, the
corresponding event bit(s) will be set high and rest all other event
bits will remain low. In healthy condition all bits will be in reset
condition. The date and time of event will be stored in its
corresponding address.
Event Records
Event
Record 1
Event
Record 2
Event
Record 3
Event
Record 4
Event
Record 5
MSW
33002
33008
33014
33020
33026
LSW
33001
33007
33013
33019
33025
Overload
33001.0
33007.0
33013.0
33019.0
33025.0
Locked Rotor
33001.1
33007.1
33013.1
33019.1
33025.1
Earth Fault
33001.2
33007.2
33013.2
33019.2
33025.2
Under current
33001.3
33007.3
33013.3
33019.3
33025.3
Current Unbalance
33001.4
33007.4
33013.4
33019.4
33025.4
Over Voltage
33001.5
33007.5
33013.5
33019.5
33025.5
Under Voltage
33001.6
33007.6
33013.6
33019.6
33025.6
Voltage Unbalance
33001.7
33007.7
33013.7
33019.7
33025.7
RTD Temperature
33001.8
33007.8
33013.8
33019.8
33025.8
Over Frequency
33001.9
33007.9
33013.9
33019.9
33025.9
Under Frequency
33001.10
33007.10
33013.10
33019.10
33025.10
Phase Loss
33001.11
33007.11
33013.11
33019.11
33025.11
Phase Reversal
33001.12
33007.12
33013.12
33019.12
33025.12
Excessive Start Time
33001.13
33007.13
33013.13
33019.13
33025.13
Successive Start
33001.14
33007.14
33013.14
33019.14
33025.14
Interlock-1
33001.15
33007.15
33013.15
33019.15
33025.15
Interlock-2
33002.0
33008.0
33014.0
33020.0
33026.0
Interlock-3
33002.1
33008.1
33014.1
33020.1
33026.1
Fail to Stop
33002.2
33008.2
33014.2
33020.2
33026.2
Over Current
33002.3
33008.3
33014.3
33020.3
33026.3
PTC Response
Resistance
33002.4
33008.4
33014.4
33020.4
33026.4
PTC Short Circuit
33002.5
33008.5
33014.5
33020.5
33026.5
PTC Open Circuit
33002.6
33008.6
33014.6
33020.6
33026.6
33002.7
33008.7
33014.7
33020.7
33026.7
33002.8
33008.8
33014.8
33020.8
33026.8
33002.9
33008.9
33014.9
33020.9
33026.9
Event Source
Reserved
Table A-3 (1): Event Record Cause Table
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
172
MEMORY MAPS
Event Records
Event
Record 1
Event
Record 2
Event
Record 3
Event
Record 4
Event
Record 5
MSW
33002
33008
33014
33020
33026
LSW
33001
33007
33013
33019
33025
33002.10
33008.10
33014.10
33020.10
33026.10
33002.11
33008.11
33014.11
33020.11
33026.11
33002.12
33008.12
33014.12
33020.12
33026.12
33002.13
33008.13
33014.13
33020.13
33026.13
33002.14
33008.14
33014.14
33020.14
33026.14
33002.15
33008.15
33014.15
33020.15
33026.15
33003
33009
33015
33021
33027
Alarm
33003.0
33009.0
33015.0
33021.0
33027.0
Pick up
33003.1
33009.1
33015.1
33021.1
33027.1
Event Source
Reserved
Address
Event Cause
Event Records
Address
Event
Record 1
Event
Record 2
Event
Record 3
Event
Record 4
Event
Record 5
33003
33009
33015
33021
33027
33003.2
33009.2
33015.2
33021.2
33027.2
33003.3
33009.3
33015.3
33021.3
33027.3
33003.4
33009.4
33015.4
33021.4
33027.4
33003.5
33009.5
33015.5
33021.5
33027.5
33003.6
33009.6
33015.6
33021.6
33027.6
33003.7
33009.7
33015.7
33021.7
33027.7
33003.8
33009.8
33015.8
33021.8
33027.8
33003.9
33009.9
33015.9
33021.9
33027.9
33003.10
33009.10
33015.10
33021.10
33027.10
33003.11
33009.11
33015.11
33021.11
33027.11
33003.12
33009.12
33015.12
33021.12
33027.12
33003.13
33009.13
33015.13
33021.13
33027.13
33003.14
33009.14
33015.14
33021.14
33027.14
33003.15
33009.15
33015.15
33021.15
33027.15
Event Cause
Reserved
Table A-3 (2): Event Record Cause Table
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
173
MEMORY MAPS
Event Records
Event
Record 1
Event
Record 2
Event
Record 3
Event
Record 4
Event
Record 5
Address
Date Format
33004
33010
33016
33022
33028
33004.0
33010.0
33016.0
33022.0
33028.0
33004.1
33010.1
33016.1
33022.1
33028.1
33004.2
33010.2
33016.2
33022.2
33028.2
33004.3
33010.3
33016.3
33022.3
33028.3
33004.4
33010.4
33016.4
33022.4
33028.4
33004.5
33010.5
33016.5
33022.5
33028.5
33004.6
33010.6
33016.6
33022.6
33028.6
33004.7
33010.7
33016.7
33022.7
33028.7
33004.8
33010.8
33016.8
33022.8
33028.8
33004.9
33010.9
33016.9
33022.9
33028.9
33004.10
33010.10
33016.10
33022.10
33028.10
33004.11
33010.11
33016.11
33022.11
33028.11
33004.12
33010.12
33016.12
33022.12
33028.12
33004.13
33010.13
33016.13
33022.13
33028.13
33004.14
33010.14
33016.14
33022.14
33028.14
33004.15
33010.15
33016.15
33022.15
33028.15
MSW
33006
33012
33018
33024
33030
LSW
33005
33011
33017
33023
33029
33005.0
33011.0
33018.0
33023.0
33029.0
33005.1
33011.1
33018.1
33023.1
33029.1
33005.2
33011.2
33018.2
33023.2
33029.2
33005.3
33011.3
33018.3
33023.3
33029.3
33005.4
33011.4
33018.4
33023.4
33029.4
33005.5
33011.5
33018.5
33023.5
33029.5
33005.6
33011.6
33018.6
33023.6
33029.6
33005.7
33011.7
33018.7
33023.7
33029.7
33005.8
33011.8
33018.8
33023.8
33029.8
33005.9
33011.9
33018.9
33023.9
33029.9
33005.10
33011.10
33018.10
33023.10
33029.10
DAY
MONTH
YEAR
TIME FORMAT
HOURS
MINUTES
Table A-3 (3): Event Record Cause Table
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
174
MEMORY MAPS
Event Records
Event
Record 1
Event
Record 2
Event
Record 3
Event
Record 4
Event
Record 5
MSW
33006
33012
33018
33024
33030
LSW
33005
33011
33017
33023
33029
33005.11
33011.11
33018.11
33023.11
33029.11
33005.12
33011.12
33018.12
33023.12
33029.12
33005.13
33011.13
33018.13
33023.13
33029.13
33005.14
33011.14
33018.14
33023.14
33029.14
33005.15
33011.15
33018.15
33023.15
33029.15
33006.0
33012.0
33017.0
33024.0
33030.0
33006.1
33012.1
33017.1
33024.1
33030.1
33006.2
33012.2
33017.2
33024.2
33030.2
33006.3
33012.3
33017.3
33024.3
33030.3
33006.4
33012.4
33017.4
33024.4
33030.4
33006.5
33012.5
33017.5
33024.5
33030.5
33006.6
33012.6
33017.6
33024.6
33030.6
33006.7
33012.7
33017.7
33024.7
33030.7
33006.8
33012.8
33017.8
33024.8
33030.8
33006.9
33012.6
33017.9
33024.9
33030.9
33006.10
33012.10
33017.10
33024.10
33030.10
33006.11
33012.11
33017.11
33024.11
33030.11
33006.12
33012.12
33017.12
33024.12
33030.12
33006.13
33012.13
33017.13
33024.13
33030.13
33006.14
33012.14
33017.14
33024.14
33030.14
33006.15
33012.15
33017.15
33024.15
33030.15
RESERVED
SECONDS
MILLISECONDS
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions
present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay
rmware version.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
175
MEMORY MAPS
B] Pro bus memory map
Cyclic Data
Data which needs to be transmitted to Pro bus master on
communication needs to be selected in parameter mapping
setting using MCOMP suite software. List of available data for
con guration in parameter mapping is discussed in cyclic data
section. If number of data selected is 14 bytes then accordingly
16I/2O modules needs to be selected from all the modules
available in GSD. GSD modules are discussed in Modules available
in GSD le.
Table A-4 shows all cyclic read data available through relay on
Pro bus communication to the Pro bus master. Different
parameters for respective data are also shown in the table.
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Parameter
Size
(Bytes)
Range of Data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Unit
Event
Record 5
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)
R Phase
RMS Current
2
0
60000
0.1
A
DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)
Y Phase
RMS Current
2
0
60000
0.1
A
DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)
B Phase
RMS Current
2
0
60000
0.1
A
DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
Type: Vector Sum
==============
MF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
MF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
Earth RMS Current
2
0
60000
1
mA
MF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
MF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
MF = 1
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)
Average RMS
Current
2
0
60000
0.1
A
DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
R Phase RMS
Voltage
2
0
60000
0.1
V
DF = 10
Y Phase RMS
Voltage
2
0
60000
0.1
V
DF = 10
B Phase RMS
Voltage
2
0
60000
0.1
V
DF = 10
Table A-4 (1): Memory Map Pro bus
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
176
MEMORY MAPS
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Parameter
Size
(Bytes)
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Range of Data
Unit
Event
Record 5
Average RMS
Voltage
2
0
60000
0.1
V
DF = 10
Frequency
2
0
1000
0.1
Hz
DF = 10
Power Factor
2
0
1000
0.001
-
DF = 1000
Phase
Sequence
2
0
60000
0.1
-
Value = 0 for 1-2-3 (R-Y-B)
Value = 1 for 1-3-2 (R-B-Y)
Total Active
Power
4
0
210000000
1
W
MF = 1
Total Reactive
Power
4
0
210000000
1
VAR
MF = 1
Total Apparent
Power
4
0
210000000
1
VA
MF = 1
Total Active
Energy
8
0
1.65564E+17
1
Wh
MF = 1
Total Reactive
Energy
8
0
1.65564E+17
1
VARh
MF = 1
Number of Start
4
0
4294967296
1
-
MF = 1
Starting Time
2
0
10000
1/50
Sec
DF = 50
Starting Peak
Current
2
0
60000
0.1
A
DF = 10
Hours Run
2
0
65535
1/60
Minutes
5
DF = 60
Total Hours Run
4
0
4294967296
1/60
Minutes
5
DF = 60
Trip Counter
4
0
4294967296
1
-
MF = 1
Trip Cause
4
0
1048575
-
-
Refer Trip Cause Table
Digital Input
Status
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Digital Input Status
Table
Digital Output
Status
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Digital Output Status
Table
Truth Table
Outputs
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Truth Table Output
Status Table
Signal Conditioners
Outputs
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Signal Conditioner
Output Status Table
Counter Outputs
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Counter Output Status
Table
Timer Outputs
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Timer Output Status
Table
Table A-4 (2): Memory Map Pro bus
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
177
MEMORY MAPS
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Parameter
Size
(Bytes)
Min
Max
Scale
Factor
(SF)
Range of Data
Unit
Event
Record 5
Motor Status
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Motor Status
Table
Expansion Module
Types
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Expansion Module
Types Status Table
Expansion Module
1 status
2
0
-
-
-
Expansion Module
2 status
2
0
-
-
-
Expansion Module
3 status
2
0
-
-
-
R-Y Line Voltage
2
0
-
1
V
DF = 1
Y-B Line Voltage
2
0
-
1
V
DF = 1
B-R Line Voltage
2
0
-
1
V
DF = 1
Total Apparent
Energy
8
0
5.1246E+12
1
Temperature
2
0
2000/10000
0.1/1
°C/Ω
DF = 10/1
Thermal Capacity
4
0
100
1
%
DF = 1
Number Of Stop
Operations
4
0
4294967296
1
-
DF = 1
% Current
Unbalance
2
0
100
1
%
DF = 1
Trip cause Ext
4
0
1048575
-
-
Refer Trip Cause Ext
Table
Motor Stop cause
4
0
-
-
-
Refer Motor Stop Cause
Table
Motor Inhibit cause
4
0
-
-
-
Refer Motor Inhibit Cause
Table
Status Word
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Status word
Table
DI-DO/ Timer/
Counter- Signal
Conditioner
2
0
-
-
-
Refer Combined word
Table
Refer Expansion Digital
I/O Status
Table
DF = 1
Table A-4 (3): Memory Map Pro bus
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
178
MEMORY MAPS
All cyclic write data available to master (2 bytes)
Parameter
Bit
Name
Output Byte 0
0.0
Forward start/
Start1/ Low speed
start
Output Byte 0
0.1
Stop
Output Byte 0
0.2
Reverse start/
High speed start
Function
In case of momentary start mode:
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all
other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
In case of maintained start mode:
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all
other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor
1 = does not stop the motor/stop is healthy/release the stop
0 =stops the motor (true for both maintained and momentary mode)
In case of momentary start mode:
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all
other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
In case of maintained start mode:
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all
other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor
Output Byte 0
0.3
Permissive
command 1
1 =set permissive output 1
Output Byte 0
0.4
Permissive
command 2
1 =set permissive output 2
Output Byte 0
0.5
Permissive
command 3
1 =set permissive output 3
0 =reset permissive output 1
0 =reset permissive output 2
0 =reset permissive output 3
When mode selection through communication is high then
Output Byte 0
0.6
Local/remote
Mode selection 1
Combination of bits 0.6 and 0.7 decides the mode selection
(local 1, local 2, local 3, remote)
When mode selection through communication is low then relay
will ignore the bit status and shall not act depending on status of
these bits for mode selection.
When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 1
Output Byte 0
0.7
Local/remote
Mode selection 2
When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = local 2
When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 3
When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = remote
Output Byte 1
1.0
Trip reset
Output Byte 1
1.1
Clear thermal
Memory
1 = reset the fault/trip condition
0 = withdraws the trip reset command/no action
1 = clears thermal memory
0 = withdraw clear thermal memory command/no action
Table A-5 (1): Cyclic write data
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
179
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Bit
Output Byte 1
1.2
Clear number of
start count
1 = clears number of start count
Output Byte 1
1.3
Clear number of
stop count
1 = clears number of stop count
Output Byte 1
1.4
Clear hour run
Output Byte 1
1.5
Clear total
hour run
Output Byte 1
1.6
Clear hour run
Output Byte 1
1.7
Reserved
Name
Function
0 = withdraw command/no action
0 = withdraw command/no action
1 = clears hour run
0 = withdraw command/no action
1 = clears total hour run
0 = withdraw command/no action
1 = clears energy
0 = withdraw command/no action
For future Use
Table A-5 (2): Cyclic write data
Data Representation
Digital Input Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Digital Input Channel #
x
0 to 7
Not applicable
6,7
Not applicable
5
DI Channel 6
4
DI Channel 5
0 = Input Low
3
DI Channel 4
1 = Input High
2
DI Channel 3
1
DI Channel 2
0
DI Channel 1
x+1
Remarks
Table A-6: Digital Input Status
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
180
MEMORY MAPS
Digital Output Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Digital Output #
x
0 to 7
Not applicable
4 to 7
Not applicable
3
DO Channel 4
0 = Output Low
2
DO Channel 3
1 = Output High
1
DO Channel 2
0
DO Channel 1
x+1
Remarks
Table A-7: Digital Output Status
Expansion Module Type Status
Profibus Data Index
x
Bit Position
Description
Remarks
3 to 7
Reserved
Reserved
2
Module 3 Status
1
Module 2 Status
0
Module 1 Status
6,7
Reserved
Reserved
Module 3 Type
01 - 8 DI Module
10 - 4DI 2DO Module
Module 2 Type
01 - 8 DI Module
10 - 4DI 2DO Module
Module 1 Type
01 - 8 DI Module
10 - 4DI 2DO Module
5
4
x+1
3
2
1
0
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Table A-8: Expansion Module Type Status
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
181
MEMORY MAPS
Expansion Digital I/O Status
Profibus Data Index
x
Bit Position
Expansion Digital I/O Channel #
2 to 7
Reserved
1
DO Channel 2
0
DO Channel 1
7
DI Channel 8
6
DI Channel 7
5
DI Channel 6
4
DI Channel 5
3
DI Channel 4
2
DI Channel 3
1
DI Channel 2
0
DI Channel 1
x+1
Remarks
Only if 4DI-2DO Module
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
(first four DI for 4DI/
2DO module)
Table A-9: Expansion Digital I/O Status
Truth Table Output Status
Profibus Data Index
x
x+1
Bit Position
Truth Table Output #
7
Truth Table 16
6
Truth Table 15
5
Truth Table 14
4
Truth Table 13
3
Truth Table 12
2
Truth Table 11
1
Truth Table 10
0
Truth Table 9
7
Truth Table 8
6
Truth Table 7
5
Truth Table 6
4
Truth Table 5
3
Truth Table 4
2
Truth Table 3
1
Truth Table 2
0
Truth Table 1
Remarks
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Table A-10: Truth Table Output Status
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
182
MEMORY MAPS
Signal Conditioner Output
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Signal Conditioner Output #
x
0 to 7
Not applicable
2 to 7
Not applicable
1
Signal Conditioner 2
0
Signal Conditioner 1
x+1
Remarks
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Table A-11: Signal Conditioner Output Status
Timer Output Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Timer Output #
x
0 to 7
Not applicable
2 to 7
Not applicable
1
Timer 2
0
Timer 1
x+1
Remarks
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Table A-12: Timer Output Status
Counter Output Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Counter Output #
x
0 to 7
Not applicable
2 to 7
Not applicable
1
Counter 2
0
Counter 1
x+1
Remarks
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Table A-13: Output Status
Combined word Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Channel #
7
Digital Output 2
6
Digital Output 1
5
Digital Input 6
4
Digital Input 5
3
Digital Input 4
2
Digital Input 3
1
Digital Input 2
0
Digital Input 1
x
Remarks
0 = Low
1 = High
Table A-14 (1): Combined Word
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
183
MEMORY MAPS
Combined word Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Channel #
7
Signal Conditioner 2 output
6
Signal Conditioner 1 output
5
Counter 2 output
4
Counter 1 output
3
Timer 2 output
2
Timer 1 output
1
Digital Output 4
0
Digital Output 3
x+1
Remarks
0 = Low
1 = High
Table A-14 (2): Combined Word
Motor Status
Profibus Data Index
Bit Position
Motor Status Bit #
Remarks
x
0 to 7
Reversed
Reversed
1 = motor running +
Iavg > 10% IFLC
7
Motor running_1
6
Two Speed status
0 = high speed
1 = low speed
5
Motor Direction Status
1 = reverse direction
0 = forward direction
4
Pickup Status
1 = Pickup is present
0 = No pickup
3
Inhibit Status
1 = Inhibit is present
0 = No Inhibit
2
Alarm Status
1 = Alarm is present
0 = No alarm
1
Trip Status
1 = Motor is tripped
0 = Motor is not tripped
0
Motor Status
1 = Motor is running
0 = Motor is stopped
x+1
0 = motor stopped or
motor running +
Iavg < 10% IFLC
Table A-15: Motor Status
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
184
MEMORY MAPS
Trip Cause
Profibus
Data Index
Size
(In Bytes)
Min Value
Max Value
Trip Cause (If Particular bit in data=1)
7
0
1
Interlock - 12
6
0
1
Interlock
11
5
0
1
Interlock
10
0
1
Interlock
9
3
0
1
Interlock
8
2
0
1
Interlock
7
1
0
1
Interlock
6
0
0
1
Interlock
5
7
0
1
Interlock
4
6
0
1
PTC Open Circuit
5
0
1
PTC Short Circuit
0
1
PTC Response Resistance
3
0
1
Over current
2
0
1
Fail to Stop
1
0
1
Interlock
3
0
0
1
Interlock
2
7
0
1
Interlock
1
6
0
1
Successive Start
5
0
1
Excessive Start Time
0
1
Phase Reversal
3
0
1
Phase Loss
2
0
1
Under Frequency
1
0
1
Over Frequency
0
0
1
Temperature
7
0
1
Voltage Unbalance
6
0
1
Under Voltage
5
0
1
Over Voltage
0
1
Current Unbalance
3
0
1
Under Current
2
0
1
Earth Fault
1
0
1
Locked Rotor
0
0
1
Overload
Bit Position
4
X
0
4
X+1
1
4
X+2
1
4
X+3
1
Table A-16: Trip Cause
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
185
MEMORY MAPS
Trip Cause Ext
Profibus
Data Index
Bit Position
Size
(In Bytes)
Min Value
Max Value
Trip Cause
(If Particular bit in data=1)
x
0 to 7
1
NA
NA
Reserved
x+1
0 to 7
1
NA
NA
Reserved
x+2
0 to 7
1
NA
NA
Reserved
NA
NA
Reserved
0
1
Mode Change
0
1
Communication Failure
2 to 7
1
x+1
1
0
Table A-17: Trip Cause Ext
Inhibit Status
Profibus
Data Index
Bit Position
Inhibiting parameter
x
0 to 7
Reserved
4 to 7
Reserved
3
Expansion unit failure
2
Stop from Communication
1
Interlock 12
0
Interlock 11
7
Interlock 10
6
Interlock 09
5
Interlock 08
4
Interlock 07
0 = No Inhibit
3
Interlock 06
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
2
Interlock 05
1
Interlock 04
0
Interlock 03
7
Interlock 02
6
Interlock 01
5
Digital input Stop
4
Maximum number of start
0 = No Inhibit
3
Thermal capacity
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
2
Trip
1
Under Voltage
0
No Voltage
x+1
x+2
x+3
Remarks
0 = No Inhibit
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
Table A-18: Inhibit Status
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
186
MEMORY MAPS
Stop Cause
Profibus
Data Index
Bit Position
Stopping parameter
4 to 7
Reserved
3
Expansion unit failure stop
2
Profibus start 2 maintained stop
0 = No Stop
1
Profibus start 1 maintained stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
0
Interlock 12
7
Interlock 11
6
Interlock 10
5
Interlock 09
4
Interlock 08
0 = No Stop
3
Interlock 07
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
2
Interlock 06
1
Interlock 05
0
Interlock 04
7
Reserved
6
Start 4 Maintained stop
5
Start 3 Maintained stop
4
Start 2 Maintained stop
0 = No Stop
3
Start 1 Maintained stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
2
Current Auto Stop
1
Voltage Auto Stop
0
Contactor Feedback
7
Interlock 3
6
Interlock 2
5
Interlock 1
4
Stop from communication
0 = No Stop
3
Digital Input Emergency Stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
2
Digital Input Stop
1
MCOMP suite Stop(HMI)
0
Trip
7
User Configurable
Defined by MCOMP suite HMI
6
User Configurable
(Refer Chapter 7 Communication for
5
User Configurable
parameters that can be defined in
4
User Configurable
this status word.)
x
x+1
x+2
x+3
x
Remarks
Table A-19 (1): Stop Cause
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
187
MEMORY MAPS
Status word
Profibus
Data Index
Bit Position
Description
3
User Configurable
2
User Configurable
1
User Configurable
0
User Configurable
7
User Configurable
Defined by MCOMP suite HMI
6
User Configurable
(Refer Chapter 7 Communication for
5
User Configurable
parameters that can be defined in
4
User Configurable
this status word.)
3
User Configurable
2
User Configurable
1
User Configurable
0
User Configurable
x
x+1
Remarks
Table A-19 (2): Stop Cause
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
188
MEMORY MAPS
Data Modules available in GSD le
There are various modules available in MCOMP Pro bus GSD le
which can be freely selected during con guration as per the
requirement. The different modules have been de ned with x
size and exibility has been provided to user to con gure the data
in a sequence required as per application. By default 10 modules
are available in MOCMP GSD with pre-de ned bytes size as
shown in Table A-20 and parameters for each of the modules
needs to be con gured through MCOMP suite software.
Customized module size can also be made available in the GSD
le upon request without changing any MCOMP
hardware/ rmware provided respective MCOMP supports that
functionality.
Note:
Refer table A-2 for parameters that can be de ned in any of the data
module through MCOMP suite HMI.
Refer Chapter 7: Communication, Pro bus Parameter mapping
section for de ning the parameters which will be transmitted to
Pro bus master on communication network.
If there is mismatch between Number of Parameters
con gured/de ned by MCOMP suite HMI which de nes length of
transmitted data from Relay to Pro bus-Master and number of
bytes requested by Pro bus-Master then there are two possible
cases as explained below:
a) Length of data requested by Pro bus-Master > Con gured
Parameter s length:
In this case Relay will append unde ned (garbage) data after
con gured/de ned parameter s data. Data of con gured
parameters will not be affected.
b) Length of data requested by Pro bus-Master < Con gured
Parameter s length:
In this case Relay will only send data requested by Pro busMaster. Data frame will be clipped beyond length de ned by
master which mean no data will come after requested number of
byte by Pro bus-Master are transmitted by Relay.
Data Modules in GSD
Sr. No.
Data Module Name
Description
1
2I/2O Module
2 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
2
4I/2O Module
4 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
3
8I/2O Module
8 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
4
10I/2O Module
10 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
5
16I/2O Module
16 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
6
22I/2O Module
22 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
7
32I/2O Module
32 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
8
64I/2O Module
64 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
9
128I/2O Module
128 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
10
138I/2O(All Data) Module
138 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
Table A-20 : Data modules in GSD
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
189
MEMORY MAPS
Acyclic Data
Table A-20 shows acyclic read data available through Relay to the
Pro bus master on Pro bus communication network. Index
column shown in table is de ned through MCOMP suite HMI and
is the sequence number of the de ned/con gured parameter.
Acyclic Data
Slot
Index
Parameter name
Data Length
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
R Phase RMS Current
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Y Phase RMS Current
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
B Phase RMS Current
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Earth RMS Current
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Average RMS Current
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
R Phase RMS Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Y Phase RMS Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
B Phase RMS Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Average RMS Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Frequency
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Power Factor
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Phase Sequence
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Active Power
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Reactive Power
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Apparent Power
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Active Energy
8
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Reactive Energy
8
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Number of Start
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Starting Time
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Starting Peak Current
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Hours Run
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Hours Run
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Trip Counter
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Trip Cause
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Digital Input Status
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Digital Output Status
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Truth Tables Output
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Signal Conditioners Output
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Counter O/P
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Timer O/P
2
Table A-21 (1): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
190
MEMORY MAPS
Acyclic Data
Slot
Index
Parameter name
Data Length
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Motor Status
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
External Module Type
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
External Module 1 Status
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
External Module 2 Status
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
External Module 3 Status
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
R-Y Line Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Y-B Line Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
B-R Line Voltage
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Total Apparent Energy
8
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Temperature
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Thermal Capacity
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Number Of Stop Operations
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
% Current Unbalance
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Trip Cause Ext
4
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Stop Cause
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Inhibit Cause
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Status Word
2
0
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
DI/DI/Timer/SignalCond/Counter
2
0
49
Trip Record 1
40
0
50
Trip Record 2
40
0
51
Trip Record 3
40
0
52
Trip Record 4
40
0
53
Trip Record 5
40
0
54
Event Record 1
16
0
55
Event Record 2
16
0
56
Event Record 3
16
0
57
Event Record 4
16
0
58
Event Record 5
16
Reserved
-
Identification & Maintenance
68
0
0
59
254
255
Table A-21 (2): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions
present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay
rmware version.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
191
MEMORY MAPS
C] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
Table A 21 shows Modbus TCP/IP memory map.
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Min Max
Size in
Bytes
Notes
LSW= Least Significant Word
MSW= Most Significant Word
Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)
Command Address(00001
00010)
Start Motor
00001
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Start Motor CMD
Stop Motor
00002
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Stop Motor CMD
Trip Reset
00003
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Trip Reset CMD
Start 2 Motor
00004
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Start 2 Motor CMD
Reset Thermal Memory
00005
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Reset Thermal Memory CMD
Store Factory Setting
00006
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Store Factory Setting CMD
Restore Factory Setting
00007
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Restore Factory Setting CMD
Capture Starting Curve
00008
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Capture Starting Curve CMD
MCOMP Reset
00009
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger MCOMP Reset CMD
Clear Energy Value
00010
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Clear Energy Value CMD
Reset Number of Starts
00011
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Reset Number of Starts CMD
Reset Number of Stop
00012
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Reset Number of Stop CMD
Reset Motor Run Hrs
00013
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Reset Motor Run Hrs CMD
Reset Total Motor Run Hours
00014
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Trigger Reset Total Motor Run Hours CMD
Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)
Command Address (00001
00010)
Motor Status
10001
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Motor Running
0 = Motor Stopped
Trip Status
10002
0
1
-
-
-
1 = MPR Tripped
0 = MPR Not Tripped
Alarm Status
10003
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Alarm present
0 = No Alarm
Inhibit Status
10004
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Inhibit present
0 = No Inhibit
Pickup Status
10005
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Pickup present
0 = No Pickup
Store Factory Settings
10006
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Store Factory Settings CMD Executed
0 = Store Factory Settings CMD Not Executed
Restore Factory Settings
10007
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Executed
0 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Not Executed
Table A-22 (1): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
192
MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Min Max
Size in
Bytes
Notes
-
-
1 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Executed
0 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Not Executed
-
-
-
1 = Thermal Memory CMD Executed
0 = Thermal Memory CMD not Executed
1
-
-
-
1 = RTC Write CMD Executed
0 = RTC Write CMD Not Executed
0
1
-
-
-
1 = MPR is Calibrated
0 = MPR is not Calibrated
10012
0
1
-
-
-
1 = EEPROM File System is working
0 = EEPROM File System is not working
I2C RTC Fail
10013
0
1
-
-
-
1 = I2C RTC Fail
0 = I2C RTC Working
I2C EEPROM FAIL
10014
0
1
-
-
-
1 = I2C EEPROM Fail
0 = I2C EEPROM Working
RDOL Direction Status
10015
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Reverse
0 = Forward
Reserved
10016
0
1
-
-
-
-
RDOL Direction Status
10017
0
1
-
-
-
1 = No Voltage Inhibit Occurred (Voltage Connect
Enable but Applied Voltage is less than 10 % Vn)
0 = No voltage inhibit not occurred
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Capture Starting Curve
10008
0
1
-
Thermal Memory
10009
0
1
RTC Write
10010
0
Calibration
10011
EEPROM File System
Under-voltage Alarm
Inhibit Status
10018
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit occurred (Voltage
Connect Enable but Applied Voltage is less than
Under voltage Alarm Set Value & Above 10 % Vn)
0 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit not occurred
Trip Inhibit Status
10019
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Motor is in Trip condition &
not Reset; 0 otherwise
Thermal Memory
Inhibit Status
10020
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Thermal memory Inhibit status occurred
(Thermal Memory > 30%)
0 = Thermal memory Inhibit status not Occurred
-
1 = Max no. of start inhibit occurred (Max
Number of Starts exceeds Permissive Starts &
Inhibit Period is not finish)
0 = Max no. of start inhibit not occurred
Max Number Start
Inhibit Status
10021
0
1
-
-
Digital I/P Stop
Inhibit Status
10022
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status occurred (One
of DI configure as STOP input & Valid STOP
input is not applied)
0 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status not occurred
Interlock 1 Inhibit
Status
10023
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Interlock 1 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1
configured as STOP input is absent)
0 = Interlock 1 Inhibit not occurred
Interlock 2 Inhibit
Status
10024
0
1
-
-
-
1 = Interlock 2 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1
configured as STOP input is absent)
0 = Interlock 2 Inhibit not occurred
Table A-22 (2): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
193
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Interlock 3 Inhibit
Status
Modbus
Address
10025
Range of data
Min
Max
0
1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
-
-
Size in
Bytes
Notes
-
1 = Interlock 3 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1
configured as STOP input is absent)
0 = Interlock 3 Inhibit not occurred
Read Input Registers (Function Code - 04)
The metering data, trip & event record data addresses are same as mentioned in Modbus RTU map.
Ethernet Module Software Version (33151 - 33152)
ETHERNET SW VERSION
Minor
33151
0
65535
-
-
2
-
Major
33152
0
65535
-
-
2
-
Read/Write Register (Function Code - 03)
Protection Settings Address (40041 - 40137)
Overload Protection
10
%
2
-
40042
Pickup Set
Value -(Pickup
Set Value
*Current
Band/1000)
10
%
2
-
40043
800
10
%
2
-
Alarm reset
40044
Pickup Set
Value -(Pickup
Set Value
*Current
Band/1000)
10
%
2
-
Thermal Memory
Reset Value
10045
5
30
1
%
2
-
Thermal Inhibit Set
40046
30
95
-
%
2
-
Pause Time Delay
Setting
10047
50
60000
50
Sec
2
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 2: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Overload pick up
40041
200
Overload pick up
Alarm pick up
Thermal memory (TM)
ON/OFF:1 (Bit 0)
Alarm (AL) ON/OFF:1
(Bit 1)
Pause Settings (PS)
ON OFF:1 (Bit 2)
Reserved: (bit 3 to bit 7)
Modes of Reset (MRL):
Local/Manual:1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset (MRR):
Remote: 1
(Bit 9)
40048
1000
1000
TM = 0
TM = 1
AL = 0
AL = 1
PS = 0
PS = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
Table A-22 (3): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
194
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Modes of Reset (MRC):
Communication/Serial:1
(Bit 10)
Modes of Reset (MRA):
Auto:1
(Bit 11)
Locked Rotor Protection
Locked Rotor pick up
40049
Locked Rotor pick
up reset
40050
Locked Rotor Alarm Set
40051
Locked Rotor Alarm
Reset
40052
Locked Rotor Trip Delay
40053
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40054
10000
10
%
2
-
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
1500
900
900
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
25
1500
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Under Voltage Protection
Under Voltage pick up
40055
Under Voltage pick
up reset
40056
Under Voltage Alarm Set
40057
20
850
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
1100
1100
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
Table A-22 (4): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
195
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Under Voltage Alarm
Reset
40058
Under Voltage Trip Delay
40059
Range of data
Min
Max
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
10
1250
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
40060
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
AL = 0
AL = 1
1 = Enable
TR = 0
TR = 1
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
MRL = 0
MRL = 1
MRR = 0
MRR = 1
-
-
2
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
1 = Enable
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset: Auto
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Current Unbalance Protection
Current Unbalance pick up
40061
Under Voltage pick
up reset
40062
Under Voltage Alarm Set
40063
Under Voltage Alarm
Reset
40064
Under Voltage Trip Delay
40065
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
40066
50
1000
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
850
1000
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
50
1500
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
-
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Table A-22 (5): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
196
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Max
Size in
Bytes
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Notes
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Temperature Protection
RTD Temperature pick up
250
1800
10
PTC Response resistance
RTD Temperature Pick
up Reset
2
2700
4000
RTD Pickup set
5
1
Ω
10
ºC
40068
PTC Reset Resistance
RTD Pickup Set value
ºC
40067
-
2
1600
2500
1
Ω
-
RTD Temperature
Alarm Set
40069
RTD Pickup set
20
10
ºC
2
-
RTD Temperature
Alarm Reset
40070
RTD Pickup set
25
10
ºC
2
-
50
Sec
2
RTD Temperature
Trip Delay
250
PTC Trip delay
Mode: Alarm (AL):1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Temperature Sensor
Type (SEN): (Bit 2)
Reserved: (Bit 3 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA): 1 (Bit 11)
5
40072
-
12500
40071
-
3000
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 2: 0 = RTD;
1 = PTC
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Under current Protection
Under current pick up
Under current pick
up reset
40073
40074
300
850
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value*
Current Band/
1000)
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
Table A-22 (6): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
197
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Under current Alarm Set
Modbus
Address
40075
Under current Alarm
Reset
40076
Under current Trip Delay
40077
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40078
Range of data
Min
Max
1100
1100
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Band/
1000)
50
6000
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
-
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
0 = Vector Sum
1 = CBCT
If user Select
Vector Sum
Pickup Set Range =
25 to 500% of IFLC
CBCT
Pickup Set Range =
0.1 to 20 A
Default = 0.1 A
Earth Fault Protection
E/F Type
40079
E/F pick up
40080
0
1
-
-
2
200
5000
10
2
10
%
or
A
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
1
E/F pick up Reset
40081
E/F Alarm pick up
40082
E/F Alarm Reset
40083
200
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current
Band/1000)
900
900
1
200
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current
Band/1000)
-
Table A-22 (7): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
198
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Min
Max
0
3000
50
0
3000
50
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Sec
2
-
Trip Delay/Trip Delay
(RUN)
40084
Trip Delay (Start)
40085
0
1250
50
Sec
2
Alarm Delay (Start)
40086
0
3000
50
Sec
2
Alarm Delay (Run)
40087
0
3000
50
Sec
2
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40088
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
This delay is applicable if user
select E/F Type as CBCT
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Voltage Unbalance Protection
Voltage Unbalance
pick up
40089
Voltage Unbalance
pick up reset
40090
Voltage Unbalance
Alarm Set
40091
50
500
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value
*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
900
900
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
40092
Voltage Unbalance
Alarm Reset
Voltage Unbalance
Trip Delay
40093
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
10
1000
Table A-22 (8): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
199
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Modbus
Address
40094
Range of data
Min
Max
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
-
-
Size in
Bytes
Notes
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Over Voltage Protection
Over Voltage
pick up
40095
Over Voltage pick
up reset
40096
Over Voltage
Alarm Set
40097
Over Voltage
Alarm Reset
40098
Over Voltage
Trip Delay
40099
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40100
1300
10
%
2
-
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value
*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
1010
950
950
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
10
1250
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
Table A-22 (9): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
200
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Under Frequency Protection
Under Frequency
pick up
40101
Under Frequency pick
up reset
40102
Under Frequency
Alarm Set
40103
Under Frequency
Alarm Reset
40104
Under Frequency
Trip Delay
40105
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40106
940
980
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value
*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
1010
1010
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
50
1500
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
-
-
Over Frequency Protection
Over Frequency
pick up
40107
Over Frequency
pick up reset
40108
Over Frequency
Alarm Set
40109
Over Frequency
Alarm Reset
40110
1050
10
%
2
-
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value
*
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
1010
990
990
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Table A-22 (10): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
201
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Over Frequency
Trip Delay
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Mode (PR) Enable/
Disable: 1 (Bit 0)
Phase Sequence (PS)
setting: 1 (Bit 1)
Reserved: (Bit 2 to
Bit 7)
Modes of Reset
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset
(MRR): Remote: 1
(Bit 9)
Modes of Reset
(MRC):
Communication/
Serial: 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset
(MRA): Auto:1
(Bit 11)
Modbus
Address
40111
40112
40113
Range of data
Min
Max
50
1500
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
50
-
-
Sec
-
-
Size in
Bytes
Notes
2
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = 1-2-3 (R Y
B); 1 = 1-3-2 (R B Y)
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
2
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Phase Loss Protection
Phase Loss Trip Delay
Trip Delay (TD)
Enable/Disable: 1
(Bit 0)
Reserved: (Bit 1 to
Bit 7)
Modes of Reset
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset (MRR):
Remote: 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset (MRC):
Communication/ Serial:
1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset
(MRA): Auto:1
(Bit 11)
40114
40115
5
1500
TD = 0
TD = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
50
-
Sec
-
Table A-22 (11): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
202
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Max
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Re Acceleration
Voltage Dip
40116
200
950
10
%
2
-
Voltage
Restoration
40117
650
950
10
%
2
-
Re Acceleration
restart time
40118
10
3000
50
Sec
2
-
Re Acceleration
restart delay
40119
200
60000
50
Sec
2
-
2
Bit 0:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Bit 1:
0 = Same;
1 = Separate
Re Acceleration
Enable/Disable: 1
(Bit 0)
Aux & Motor Supply:
1 (Bit 1)
40120
0
1
-
-
Max number of Start Protection
Reference period
40121
45000
180000
3000
Min
4
-
Permissive starts
40122
1
30
1
-
2
-
Inhibit period
40123
3000
360000
3000
Min
4
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Max Start (SS)
Enable/Disable: 1
(Bit 0)
Reserved: (Bit 1 to
Bit 7)
Modes of Reset
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset
(MRR): Remote: 1(Bit 9)
Modes of Reset
(MRC):
Communication/Serial:
1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset(MRA):
Auto:1 (Bit 11)
40126
SS = 0
SS = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
Excessive Start Time Protection
Excessive Start Time
Protection (ESTP)
Enable/Disable: 1
(Bit 0)
Modes of Reset
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset
(MRR): Remote: 1
40128
TD = 0
TD = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Table A-22 (12): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
203
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Excessive Start Time Protection
(Bit 9)
Modes of Reset
(MRC):
Communication/
Serial:1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset
(MRA): Auto: 1
(Bit 11)
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Hysteresis Band settings
Current
40129
30
150
10
%
2
-
Voltage
40130
30
150
10
%
2
-
Frequency
40131
30
150
10
%
2
-
Under current Protection
Over current pick up
40132
Over current pick
up reset
40133
Over current
Alarm Set
40134
Over current
Alarm Reset
40135
Over current
Trip Delay
40136
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40137
10000
10
%
2
-
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value*
Current Band/
1000)
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
10
%
2
-
50
Sec
2
-
2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
500
900
900
Pickup Set Value (Pickup Set Value *
Current Band/
1000)
5
500
AL = 0
AL = 1
TR = 0
TR = 1
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
-
-
Table A-22 (13): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
204
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Max
Size in
Bytes
Notes
System Settings Address (40151 - 40177)
Motor Settings
Full Load Current
40151
6
8000
10
A
2
-
Motor Voltage
40152
380
480
1
V
2
Setting must be 380 or 415 or 480
Auxiliary Supply
40153
24
230
1
V
2
-
Voltage connect
40154
0
1
1
-
2
0=Disable / 1=Enable
Trip Class
40155
5
40
1
-
2
5 = Class 5
10 = Class 10
15 = Class 15
20 = Class 20
25 = Class 25
30 = Class 30
Starting Time
40156
50
10000
50
Sec
2
-
Frequency selection
40157
500
600
10
Hz
2
50 Hz or 60 Hz
Running Current
40158
20
100
1
%
2
-
System type
40159
0
1
1
-
2
0 = 3 Phase
1 = 3 Phase
4 Wire
3 Wire
MCOMP Software
Software version
40163
0
9999
100
-
2
-
Type of starter
40164
0
4
1
-
2
0-DOL
1-RDOL
2-Star Delta
Time in Star
40165
50
1500
50
Sec
2
Max value of Time in star =
(Starting time -1) seconds
Chang Over Delay
40166
5
10000
50
Sec
2
-
2
Bit Field - Description
---------------------0 - Local
1 - Remote
2 - Communication
When LOCAL Selected
------------------------5 - Local Only
6 - Remote Only
When REMOTE Selected
----------------------------Remote Start1 (In case of RDOL show
Start1 & Start2)
7 - Local Only
8 - Remote Only
Remote Start2
(In case of RDOL show Start3 & Start4)
Mode- Display/
Local/Remote/
Comm
40167
0
4095
1
-
Table A-22 (14): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
205
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
9 - Local Only
10 - Remote Only
When COMMUNICATION Selected
--------------------------------11 - Local Only
12 - Remote Only
External CT settings
Ratio
40168
1
10000
10
-
2
-
Primary Current
40169
1
10000
1
-
2
-
Secondary Current
40170
1
5
1
-
2
Setting must be 1 or 5
Mode
40171
0
1
1
-
2
0=Disable / 1=Enable
EventPickup (EP): 1
Bit 0 - 0 = Disable/
(Bit 0)
1 = Enable
EventTrip (ET): 1
Bit 1 - 0 = Disable/
(Bit 1)
ES = 0
EventAlarm (EA): 1
ES = 1
1 = Enable
Bit 2 - 0 = Disable/
(Bit 2)
ET = 0
ET = 1
Reserved: 5
EA = 0
EA = 1
40172
-
-
2
1 = Enable
AS = 0
AS = 1
(AS): 1 (Bit 8)
VAS = 0
VAS = 1
1 = Enable
Voltage Auto Stop
CAS = 0
CAS = 1
Bit 9 - 0 = Disable/
Auto Start Detect
Bit 8 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
(VAS): 1 (Bit 9)
Bit 10 - 0 = Disable/
Current Auto Stop
1 = Enable
(CAS): 1 (Bit 10)
Reserved1: 5
Motor Tag
Max 10 Ascii Char
wide Motor Tag
40173
-
-
-
-
2
40174
-
-
-
-
2
40175
-
-
-
-
2
40176
-
-
-
-
2
40177
-
-
-
-
2
Characters allowed are A-Z, a-z, 0-9
and Special chars: #, - , _ , . , ' & space
(Hex values will be shown at register
address).
For e.g. if Motor Tag is 1234567890
then Address 40173 will show 3231,
40174 = 3433, 40175 = 3635,
40176 = 3837 & 40177 = 3039
User can select maximum of 10
Characters Motor tag number.
If Motor Tag is of less than 10 chars,
special char space (Hex 20) will be
added for remaining characters.
Table A-22 (15): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
206
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Communication Settings Address (40191 - 40213)
Modbus
Mode
40191
1
2
-
-
2
1 = RTU
Node Address
40192
1
247
-
-
2
1 to 247
Baud Rate
40193
0
1
-
-
2
0 = 9600
1 =19200
Parity
40194
0
2
-
-
2
0 = No parity
1 = Even Parity
2 = Odd Parity
Stop Bits
40195
0
1
-
-
2
0 = 1 Stop bit
1 = 2 Stop bits
Modbus
Mode
40196
0
2
-
-
2
0 = MODBUS
1 = Profibus
2 = Ethernet
Node Address
40197
1
126
-
-
2
Manual Address 01 - 125
Auto Address = 126
Bit 0
0 -Disable / 1 - Enable
Bit 1
0 = '-' / 1 = '1
Ethernet
Mode: DHCP: 1(Bit 0)
Time Zone Sign: 1(Bit 1)
Reserved: (Bit 2 to Bit 15)
40203
0
1
-
-
2
IP Address
40204
0
4294967
296
-
-
4
Subnet Mask
40206
0
4294967
296
-
-
4
Default Gateway
40208
0
4294967
296
-
-
4
SNTP Server Address
40210
0
4294967
296
-
-
4
Time Zone GMT
Hour: 8 (Bit 0-7)
Time Zone GMT Min:
8 (Bit 8-15)
Reserved: (Bit 16
to bit 31)
40212
0
4294967
296
-
-
4
e.g if Address is
192(0xCO).168(0x78).120(0xA8).
105(0x69)
then value will be
0x69A878C0 = 1772648640
Hrs = 0 to 13
Min = 0 to 59
Table A-22 (16): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
207
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
DIO Settings Address (40231 - 40282)
Input 1
Mode- Display/
Local/Remote/
Comm
40231
1
8192
1
-
2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period
40232
5
3000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
2
Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
should be updated if
user selects interlock
type as trip
Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Interlock Config
Interlock Trip Delay
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:
Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/
Serial (MRC)
(Bit - 10)
40233
40234
1
ITD = 1
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
TI = 0
MM = 0
1024
ITD = 100
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
1
ITD = 10
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
-
ITD
in
Sec
Table A-22 (17): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
208
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)
(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode
(MM) (Bit - 13)
Notes
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as STOP otherwise
must be Load Default
Value 0
Input 2
Type of Input
40235
1
8192
1
-
2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period
40236
5
3000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
2
Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
should be updated if
user selects interlock
type as trip
Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Interlock Config
Interlock Trip Delay
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:
Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
40237
1
1024
1
40238
ITD = 1
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
TI = 0
MM = 0
ITD = 100
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
ITD = 10
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
-
ITD
in
Sec
Table A-22 (18): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
209
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as STOP otherwise
must be Load Default
Value 0
Modes of Reset:
Communication/
Serial (MRC)
(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)
(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode
(MM) (Bit - 13)
Input 3
Type of Input
40239
1
8192
1
-
2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period
40240
5
3000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
Interlock Config
40241
1
1024
1
-
Table A-22 (19): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
210
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Interlock Trip Delay
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:
Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/
Serial (MRC)
(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)
(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode
(MM) (Bit - 13)
Modbus
Address
40242
Range of data
Min
ITD = 1
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
TI = 0
MM = 0
Max
ITD = 100
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
ITD = 10
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
ITD
in
Sec
Size in
Bytes
Notes
2
Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
should be updated if
user selects interlock
type as trip
Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as STOP otherwise
must be Load Default
Value 0
Input 4
Type of Input
40243
1
8192
1
-
2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period
40244
5
3000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
Interlock Config
40245
1
1024
1
-
Table A-22 (20): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
211
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Interlock Trip Delay
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:
Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/
Serial (MRC)
(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)
(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode
(MM) (Bit - 13)
Modbus
Address
40246
Range of data
Min
ITD = 1
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
TI = 0
MM = 0
Max
ITD = 100
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
ITD = 10
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
ITD
in
Sec
Size in
Bytes
Notes
2
Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
should be updated if
user selects interlock
type as trip
Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as STOP otherwise
must be Load Default
Value 0
Input 5
Type of Input
40247
1
8192
1
-
2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period
40248
5
3000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
Interlock Config
40249
1
1024
1
-
Table A-22 (21): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
212
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Interlock Trip Delay
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:
Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/
Serial (MRC)
(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)
(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode
(MM) (Bit - 13)
Modbus
Address
40250
Range of data
Min
ITD = 1
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
TI = 0
MM = 0
Max
ITD = 100
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
ITD = 10
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
ITD
in
Sec
Size in
Bytes
Notes
2
Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
should be updated if
user selects interlock
type as trip
Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as STOP otherwise
must be Load Default
Value 0
Input 6
Type of Input
40251
1
8192
1
-
2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period
40252
5
3000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
Interlock Config
40253
1
1024
1
-
Table A-22 (22): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
213
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Interlock Trip Delay
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:
Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/
Serial (MRC)
(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)
(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode
(MM) (Bit - 13)
Modbus
Address
40254
Range of data
Min
ITD = 1
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
TI = 0
MM = 0
Max
ITD = 100
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
ITD = 10
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
TI = 1
MM = 1
ITD
in
Sec
Size in
Bytes
Notes
2
Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
should be updated if
user selects interlock
type as trip
Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should be
updated if user
selects interlock type
as STOP otherwise
must be Load Default
Value 0
Output 1
Type of Output
40255
1
16384
1
-
4
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward Relay
Bit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
Bit 13 - Drive Available
=====
1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Mode (Level/Pulse)
40257
0
1
1
-
2
0 = Level /1 =Pulse
Hold Time
40258
5
50000
50
Sec
2
Only used if mode is pulse
Time Delay for Follow Relay
40259
5
50000
50
Sec
2
-
4
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Output 2
Type of Output
40260
1
16384
1
-
Table A-22 (23): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
214
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward Relay
Bit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
Bit 13 - Drive Available
=====
1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Mode (Level/Pulse)
40262
0
1
1
-
2
0 = Level /1 =Pulse
Hold Time
40263
5
50000
50
Sec
2
Only used if mode is pulse
Time Delay for Follow Relay
40264
5
50000
50
Sec
2
-
Output 3
Type of Output
40265
1
16384
1
-
4
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward Relay
Bit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
Bit 13 - Drive Available
=====
1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Mode (Level/Pulse)
40267
0
1
1
-
2
0 = Level /1 =Pulse
Hold Time
40268
5
50000
50
Sec
2
Only used if mode is pulse
Time Delay for Follow Relay
40269
5
50000
50
Sec
2
-
4
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Output 4
Type of Output
40270
1
16384
1
-
Table A-22 (24): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
215
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Max
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward Relay
Bit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
Bit 13 - Drive Available
=====
1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Mode (Level/Pulse)
40272
0
1
1
-
2
0 = Level /1 =Pulse
Hold Time
40273
5
50000
50
Sec
2
Only used if mode is pulse
Time Delay for Follow Relay
40274
5
50000
50
Sec
2
-
2
0 - Ir
1 - Iy
2 - Ib
3 - Iavg
4 - Vr
5 - Vy
6 - Vb
7 - Vavg
8 - Vry
9 - Vyb
10 - Vbr
11 - Apparent Power
12 - Reactive Power
13 - Active Power
14 - Temperature
15 - Frequency
4
Current (Ir, Iy, Ib, Iavg)= 0
Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg,
Vry, Vyb, Vbr) = 0
Power (Apparent,
Reactive, Active) = 0
Temperature = 0
Frequency = 0
4
Current (Ir, Iy,Ib, Iavg) = 3600
Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg) = 375
Line Voltage (Vry, Vyb,Vbr) = 650
Power (Apparent,
Reactive, Active) =28.3
Temperature = 200
Frequency = 75
Analog Output
Type of Input
Min
Max
40275
40276
40278
0
0
>Min
Value
15
<Min
Value
3600
1
1
10
-
-
-
Table A-22 (25): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
216
MEMORY MAPS
Parameter
Modbus
Address
Range of data
Min
Max
Scale
Factor Unit
(SF)
Size in
Bytes
Notes
Scale Factor
40280
0
1
1
-
2
0 = Factory Set
1 = Manual
Expected Output
40281
4
20
10
mA
2
-
Actual Output
40282
1
24
10
mA
2
-
Real Time Clock Data Address (40501 - 40506)
Sec
40501
0
59
-
Sec
2
-
Min
40502
0
59
-
Min
2
-
Hours
40503
0
23
-
-
2
-
Date
40504
1
31
-
-
2
-
Month
40505
1
12
-
-
2
-
Year
40506
0
99
-
-
2
-
Table A-22 (26): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions
present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay
rmware version.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
217
ANNEXURE B - APPLICATION NOTES
Overview
One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus
serial, Pro bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for
all these communication protocols is described below.
One Digital Output to be selected as RUN.
Figure B 1 shows the DOL starter wiring diagram. The
connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system.
The connection may be different for different type of system
selection.
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map
When the Relay receives START1 input, RUN output picks up after
validating all the start inhibit conditions (Refer Inhibit Status in
chapter Testing and Troubleshooting). When the RUN output is
activated, the contactor picks up, which starts the Motor. When a
STOP command is received by the Relay, RUN output drops out,
contactor drops out and the motor stops.
DOL Starter
This is the simplest and widely used type of starter. The selection
of a DOL starter is based on the rating of the motor.
Basic settings required in the Relay for DOL starter:
Starter type to be selected as DOL.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE
L/+
N/-
6
1
3
5
RESET
3-PH.VOLTAGE
AUX.VOLT
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
B
CM UNIT
CBCT
Y
71 72
N/- L/+
START
STOP
R
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
4
DIGITAL INPUTS
CONTACTOR
2
82
83
81
85 CONTACTOR COIL
86
84
88
89
87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
90
PWR/COMM
S1
R
Y
S2
B
M
RTD/PTC
MOTOR STATUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
Tl1 Tl2 AO1 AO2
RS485
D+ D-
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
RST
ENT
L
Mini USB Port N
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
Figure B-1: DOL Starter Wiring Diagram
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
218
APPLICATION NOTES
RDOL Starter
This type of starter is used when the motor is required to run in
both forward as well as reverse directions depending upon the
application.
Basic settings required in the Relay for RDOL starter:
Starter type to be selected as RDOL.
One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
One Digital Input to be selected as START2.
One Digital Output to be selected as FORWARD RELAY.
One Digital Output to be selected as REVERSE RELAY.
Figure B-2 shows the RDOL starter wiring diagram. The
connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system.
The connection may be different for different type of system
selection.
When the Relay receives START1(forward start) input, FORWARD
RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit
conditions. When the FORWARD RELAY output is activated, the
contactor A picks up starting the Motor in forward direction.
When the Relay receives START2(reverse start) input, REVERSE
RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit
conditions. When the REVERSE RELAY output is activated, the
contactor B picks up starting the Motor in reverse direction. When
a STOP command is received by the Relay, FORWARD
RELAY/REVERSE RELAY output drops out, corresponding
contactor drops out and the motor stops.
When motor is running in forward direction and Relay receives
START2 input, it will ignore the command and will continue to run
in forward direction. When motor is running in reverse direction
and Relay receives START1 input, it will ignore the command and
will continue to run in reverse direction.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE
L/+
N/-
1
6
3
5
CONTACTOR A
2
1
4
3
CONTACTOR B
6
5
START1
START2
STOP
RESET
Y
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
71 72
N/- L/+
3-PH.VOLTAGE
AUX.VOLT
B
CM UNIT
CBCT
R
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
4
DIGITAL INPUTS
2
82
83
81
85 CONTACTOR COIL
86
84
88
89
87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
90
PWR/COMM
S1
R
Y
S2
B
M
RTD/PTC
MOTOR STATUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
Tl1 Tl2 AO1 AO2
RS485
D+ D-
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
RST
ENT
L
Mini USB Port N
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
Figure B-2: RDOL Starter Wiring Diagram
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
219
APPLICATION NOTES
STAR/DELTA Starter
This type of starter provides two types of connections, Star and
Delta. During starting time, the star connection reduces the high
starting current and then automatically switches to delta after set
time in star setting.
Basic settings required in the Relay for STAR-DELTA starter:
Starter type to be selected as STAR-DELTA.
Time in Star setting to be set as per requirement.
Star-Delta change over delay setting to be set as per
requirement.
One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
One Digital Output to be selected as MAIN.
Figure B-3 shows the Star-delta wiring diagram. The connections
in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The
connection may be different for different type of system selection.
When the Relay receives START1 input, MAIN and STAR output
picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. Also the
'time in star' timer starts. When the MAIN and STAR output is
activated, the contactor A and contactor C picks up starting the
Motor in reduced voltage condition. The 'time in star' timer
expires and STAR output drops out, dropping contactor C. The
DELTA output picks up after the set 'change over delay' timer
expires. When the DELTA output is activated, the contactor B
picks up and motor comes in running condition. When a STOP
command is received by the Relay, MAIN and DELTA outputs drop
out, corresponding contactors drop out and the motor stops.
The MAIN output remains in pick up condition during change
over between STAR to DELTA.
One Digital Output to be selected as STAR.
One Digital Output to be selected as DELTA.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE
L/+
N/-
R
Y
B
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
71 72
N/- L/+
3-PH.VOLTAGE
AUX.VOLT
S1
RESET
S2
CONTACTOR A
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
Dl5
Dl6
COM
CONTACTOR B
CONTACTOR C
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
STOP
DIGITAL INPUTS
CM UNIT
CBCT
START
82
83
81
CONTACTOR A COIL (MAIN)
85
86
84
88 CONTACTOR B COIL (STAR)
89
87
91 CONTACTOR C COIL (DELTA)
92
90
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
R1 Y1 B1
R2 Y2 B2
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
Tl1 Tl2 AO1 AO2
M
RTD/PTC
RS485
D+ D-
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIP
RST
ENT
L
Mini USB Port N
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
Figure B-3: STAR/DELTA Starter Wiring Diagram
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
220
APPLICATION NOTES
B] Non Motor Load Application
voltage/no voltage condition.
The MCOMP relay is suitable for non-motor load application as
well. The application can be of heater feeder or MCCB feeder
used in case of lighting load etc.
Conventionally two aux contacts, 1ON delay and 1 OFF delay
timer per feeder is required to implement the reacceleration
scheme which causes the increase in module size, increase in cost
and reduction in reliability as the number of dependent
component increases.
For such applications, one should correctly set the Feeder type
in System setting as Non-Motor .
Certain protections and related functions (alarm, trip, inhibit) are
not available in case of Non-Motor application which are as
follows:
The MCOMP relay provides the re-acceleration function as an
inbuilt feature with no need of any additional aux contacts and
external timer.
The two cases in Re-acceleration supported by MCOMP are as
follows:
1. Thermal Overload
2. Locked Rotor
3. Current Unbalance
1. Motor Re-acceleration function:
4. Phase Loss
Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or
no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the
power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor
should continue to run without any interruption. The output
contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will
continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the
last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.
5. Phase Reversal
6. Under Current
7. Maximum number of starts
8. Excessive Start Time
9. All voltage based protections and functions
Whenever there is an attempt to change in this Feeder type
setting (in case of drive is running or not running), the relay and
display unit needs to be power recycled for successful intended
operation.
C] Re-acceleration Application
Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor
automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage
dips. The re-acceleration or motor restart function plays very
important role in industries where the critical motor needs to be
restarted immediately (or with some delay) without manual
intervention in case of process interruption due to under-
2. Motor Re-start function:
Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or novoltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200
ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored
within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart
delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay,
then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to
UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy
restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be
restarted. Table 6 16 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings
available in the Relay.
Parameter
Setting range
Description
Voltage Dip
20 to 90 % of VN
Motor Voltage should go below/equal to this
threshold value to sense as valid voltage dip
Voltage Restoration
60 to 95 % of VN
Motor Voltage should restore higher than or
equal to this set value to sense as valid
voltage recovery
Restart Time
0.2 to 60 sec
Time for which relay will wait for voltage
restoration
Restart Delay
4 to 1200 sec
Validation time (healthy voltage should sustain
for this much period) before actual starting the
motor after successful voltage recovery
Aux and Motor Supply
Same and Separate
Letting know the MCOMP relay if the auxiliary
supply for it is from the same 3 phase motor
supply bus or it is from separate source
Mode
Enable or Disable
To enable or disable motor restart function
Table B-1: Re-acceleration Protection Settings
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
221
APPLICATION NOTES
After healthy restoration of the voltage if all the critical motors
gets restarted at the same time, there may be a chance that the
incoming feeder will again see a power deep and trips on undervoltage. To avoid this situation, one should group the critical
motors with different priorities. The highest priority motor group
should start rst and should have same restart delay settings. The
next priority motor group should then start and should have
restart delay setting higher than restart delay setting of
highest priority motor group. The wide range of restart delay
setting present in the relay will allow the user to con gure for the
staggered starting of the motors and thereby ful lling the
requirement.
Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/novoltage condition occurs.
Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart
command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.
D] 3P-3W, 3P-4W Application
The MCOMP relay can be con gured as per the system voltage
availability. There is a setting available as Input Voltage in
System Setting for selection of system voltage as 3P-3W or 3P4W. In case of 3P-3W, R-Y-B voltage needs to be connected to the
relay voltage terminals with 1st terminal of the relay required to
be body or panel earthed. In case of 3P-4W, R-Y-B-N voltage
needs to be connected to relay voltage terminals.
In case of 3P-3W, VN = VL-L and
in case of 3P-4W, VN = VL-L /
3,
where VL-L = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage and
VN = Nominal voltage used in the relay for protections.
All the voltage based protection is dependent on VN and hence
proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required
function.
3P-4W CONNECTION
3P-3W CONNECTION
R
R
Y
Y
B
B
N
SFU/MCCB
SFU/MCCB
FUSE
FUSE
EARTH
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
N
B
Y
R
N
B
Y
R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
3-PH.VOLTAGE
Figure B-5: 3P-3W, 3P-4W Connection Diagram
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
222
APPLICATION NOTES
E] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input)
Application
Conventionally a separate winding heating contact with delay
timer is required to ful ll the requirement.
In certain applications where due to space constraint only two
phase inputs are required to be connected to the relay for voltage
metering and protections, the MCOMP relay comes as an
intelligent option.
The relay provides a dedicated output called heater output for
energizing the winding heating coil present in the feeder and
gives the setting of time delay as heater delay from 1 3600
sec in Digital output setting section. This eliminates the need of
extra timer required in the feeder to achieve the winding heating
requirement in a compact scheme.
There is a setting available in the relay as Phase Selection in
System Setting for the same. When selected as two phase, there
is no need to connect the third voltage phase to the relay and
relay will calculate the same internally.
2 PHASE INPUT CONNECTION
R
Y
SFU/MCCB
EARTH
1
2
3
4
N
B
Y
R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
Refer digital output settings present in chapter 9 Settings for
con guration of heater output of this application.
G] Analog Output Application
Analog meters are generally used for remote metering. In a eld
where motor is present, the operator comes to know the current
drawn by the motor during running condition (or any other
intended parameter such as availability of healthy three phase
voltage before motor starting) with the help of analog meters.
This meter accept the input in form of 4-20 mA current and
provides the corresponding equivalent analog scale depending on
the selected parameter.
Conventionally a separate transducer along with CT is required to
provide the 4 20 mA signal corresponding to one of the three
phase current. This increases the space requirement of the motor
feeder, cost and reduces the reliability. The required 4-20 mA
signal can be generated from MCOMP as an analog output and
can be directly wired to analog meter for metering. One user
con gurable 4-20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay
which can be con gured to any of the parameter such as R/Y/B
phase current, R/Y/B phase voltage, power, frequency etc. The
relay terminals for wiring analog output are AO1 and AO2. It is
necessary to know the loading requirement of the device for
proper operation of the relay.
Maximum Burden (load) the MCOMP relay can see without
affecting its output current of 4-20mA is 100 ohm. So the total
burden on MCOMP should be less than 100 ohm on analog
output channels for intended functionality of MCOMP analog
output section. If the burden exceeds 100 ohm, variation in
output current can be observed.
Figure B-6: Two Phase Input Connection
The terminal number 1 of the relay needs to be connected to
clean earth for intended operation of the relay in case two phase
is selected in setting. While selection is on three phase, one needs
to necessarily follow the connections as mentioned in 3P-3W or in
3P-4W cases.
F] Winding Heating Application
In small motors (typically < 30kW) when the motors are in off
condition for a very long duration and the moisture content in the
environment is high, it is necessary to keep the motor winding
warm to have proper starting of the motor during next start.
Generally 24VAC supply is provided in two windings of the motor
to achieve this with some delay after motor gets stopped.
For calculating maximum length of wire which can be connected
from analog meter present in eld (or from DCS) to the relay
without affecting its output (4-20mA), one needs to know
resistivity of the wire and cross sectional area of the wire used.
The consideration of LCS meter (Analog meter) burden or DCS
terminal burden in the calculation is important for proper
functioning.
Here is the example for length calculation for copper wire having
resistivity of 1.72E-08 m and considering area of 2.5E-06 sq.m.
For 500 meter length of wire, using the standard formula of
resistivity (R =
L/A where, R=resistance,
= resistivity,
L=length, A=area), the burden offer from wire comes to be 3.44
ohm. Considering the approximate burden of 20 ohm of Analog
meter (or DCS terminal), the total burden comes out to be 20 +
3.44 = 23.44 Ohm which is less than 100 ohm (MCOMP burden
handle capacity).
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
223
APPLICATION NOTES
The relay s analog output will continue to provide correct 4-20mA
signal as long as total external burden is less than 100 ohm.
Note: DCS burden considered for calculations is just an assumption.
User should consider actual values for the calculations.
H] Pro bus Communication Application
Basic info regarding Pro bus protocol:
Parameter
Specification of Profibus DP RS 485
Media
Copper or Fiber
Transmission Rate
9.6 kbps to 12 mbps
Topology
Line topology with termination
Number of nodes
Up to 32 nodes per segment (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)
Max total 126 per network (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)
Number of repeaters
Max 9 with signal refreshing
Profibus Cable
Twisted, shielded two-wire cable, cable type A
Table B-2: Pro bus speci cation
As per standard,
Maximum number of nodes in a segment = 32
Maximum number of nodes in a loop = 126
Segment 1 => Master to R1
Segment 2 => R1 to R2
Loop => Master to R2
Figure B-7: Typical pro bus loop connection
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
224
APPLICATION NOTES
General Calculation for nding number of slaves which can
be connected in a single loop:
Within a segment all PROFIBUS masters, slaves, repeaters, optical
link modules etc. count towards the 32-device limit. This means,
for example, that when two repeaters are connected to a
segment the maximum number of PROFIBUS stations is reduced
to 30. It is good practice to leave at least 10% spare capacity per
segment for future expansion and one for diagnostic tool etc.
An application of a repeater is shown in below gure
Repeater extending
the transmission path
Repeater for
segmenting
Figure B-8: Repeater
Pre-requisites for calculation:
Transmission rate
Number of data bytes expected from each slave = A
Master s(PLC/DCS) IO byte handling capability = B
Redundancy module s IO byte handling capability (if present in
the network) = C
Repeater use permissible?
The standard says that a maximum of 9 repeaters may be used
between any master and slave station. However many repeaters
exhibit an increased delay, meaning a maximum of only 4
repeaters giving 5 in-line segments is recommended practically.
This implies a maximum of 5 in-line segments from a master to
the furthest slave. It is strictly recommended to use the repeaters
of same make in a single loop.
The repeater location is based on below two conditions. The
repeaters can be placed anywhere as long as below two
conditions are ful lled:
Calculation:
Select the lowest Input/Output byte handling capability
number from B & C .
Divide that number by A . (D=B/A or D=C/A)
The value of D indicates the maximum number of slaves
which can be ef ciently handled by the master through
Redundancy module and can be connected in a single loop.
Now if value of
Each segment generated by using repeater should have
maximum 32 numbers of nodes (including repeater) as per
standard.
Each segment length should be less than the standard
segment length of selected transmission rate.
Pro bus Cabling and Installation:
D < 26 then repeater is not required.
26 < D < 28 then Repeater may or may not be required.
D > 28 then Use of repeater is mandatory.
So it is recommended to restrict the maximum number of slave
devices (including spares) in a particular segment up to 26. User
may go beyond this as per feasibility study results.
Deciding repeater usage in a project:
Repeater usage is mandatory if any of the following is true:
Number of devices in a segment (including master,
Redundancy modules, slave devices) exceeds 32
Total segment length for desired transmission rate exceeds
beyond the permissible segment length.
Refer below table for standard segment length for each
transmission rate.
Transmission rate
Transmission range per Segment (m)
9.6 kbps to 187.5 kbps
1000 m
500 kbps
400 m
1.5 mbps
200 m
3, 6, 12 mbps
100 m
Table B-3: Transmission range
General Guidelines:
In case of RS485 transmission technology, cable type A should
be used.
When connecting the nodes, ensure that the data cables are
not mixed up.
To achieve high interference resistance of the system against
electro-magnetic radiation, a shielded data cable (type A is
shielded) should de nitely be used.
The shielding is to be connected to the protective ground on
both sides ensuring good conductivity via large-area shield
clamps.
Equipotential bonding of all connected
recommended.
eld devices is also
Ensure that the data cable is laid as far away from all high
-current cables as possible and they should not run in parallel
as far as possible. If they need to cross, they should cross at
right angle.
Stubs must absolutely be avoided.
The number of nodes which can be connected to a segment is
limited to 32.
The permissible length of a segment for a selected
transmission rate should be considered during routing of
Pro bus cable.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
225
APPLICATION NOTES
Parameter
Specified Limits
Impedance
135..165
Operational Capacity
with f = 3
.20 MHz
< 30 pF / m
Loop Resistance
< 110
/ km
Wire diameter
> 0.64 mm
Wire CSA
> 0.34 mm2
Construction
Shielded, twisted pair
Table B-4: Cable type A Electrical speci cations
Cable Segregation:
Below table shows the distances according to EN 50174-2 that
must be maintained between PROFIBUS cables (shielded data
cable) and other cables. The table also lists two variants with a
metal isolating segment. Here, it is assumed that a metal partition
has the same effect as a cable shield.
Spacing
Profibus cable and
cable for
Without partition or with
non-metallic partition
Partition made out of
Aluminum
Partition made out of Steel
0 mm
0 mm
0 mm
200 mm
100 mm
50 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0 mm
Signal Transmission
Network signals such as
PROFIBUS.
Digital data signals for PCs,
programming devices,
printers, etc.
Shielded analog inputs or
outputs
Power Supply or 3 phase power
Un-Shielded
Shielded
Table B-5: Cable segregation
Shielding of Pro bus Cable:
As per Pro bus international document (PROFIBUS Installation
Guideline for Cabling and Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006
Order No: 8.022), if no shield connection exists, the shielding of
the PROFIBUS cable must be connected to the equipotential
Other shielded
cables
e.g. power supply
Shielding
connection
bonding as close as possible to the PROFIBUS station. For
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) reasons you should connect
the shield of the PROFIBUS cable to the equipotential bonding
system at both ends.
Trunk Cable
Field Device
Drop Cable
Junction
Box
Field Device
Drop Cable
equipotential bonding system
safe area
explosion hazardous area
Figure B-9: Pro bus cable shielding
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
226
APPLICATION NOTES
Several options are available for establishing the large-area
connection between the shielding and the equipotential bonding
system. The following gure shows various techniques that can
be adapted in the eld. For more information regarding
connection, refer PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and
Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 Order No: 8.022 document.
2. Pickup and interference caused by:
Laying bus cables too close to electrically noisy power cables or
equipment.
Screen current due to earth potential differences between
areas of the network.
3. Wiring problems:
Wrong cable used (e.g. using PA cable for DP segments).
Damaged cable (including squashed, over-bent)
Swapped cores at a device (B-RED rule broken)
Un-earthed screen (not connected at every device)
4. Segment rules broken:
Cable too long for the bit rate used.
Figure B-10: Shielding and equipotential bonding system
Too many devices (never more than 32 RS-485 drivers on a
segment).
Special requirements for transmission rates >1.5 Mbit/s:
Use of spur lines (keep short at lower bit rates and don t use at
higher bit rates).
Use of bit-rate greater than 1.5 Mbit/s requires special
connectors with built in inductors.
Spur lines are not allowed when using bit rates greater than
1.5 Mbit/s.
5. Damaged or uncerti ed devices
Excessive connection capacitance.
Faulty or poor quality RS-485 driver chips
The maximum segment length is 100m.
A minimum cable length of 1m is recommended between any
two stations.
I] Protection Function Application
Thermal Overload Case Study
Guidelines for redundancy module placement in a switchboard:
It is always recommended to place a redundancy module at the
start of the loop.
In case of more than one redundancy module, it is
recommended to keep all the redundancy modules at one
location for easy automation. Starting loop connection of slave
devices for each redundancy module needs to be brought up
to that single location.
In MCOMP Relay due to constant asymptotic factor k the thermal
curve plotted is shifted by 1.15 Times of Iset i.e. If IFLC = 100A,
Iset = 100% (Step Size 5%) the curve starts from 1.15 Time of
IFLC.
In certain applications thermal Overload Curve calculations
should start from 100% of FLC. To achieve the thermal overload
curve starting at 98% of FLC we have to set Iset at 85% so that
the curve starts at 98% of FLC (i.e. 85 * 1.15).
But when user is setting Iset = 85% in thermal overload setting, it
means any current above 85% of FLC is not the normal running
current. However relay will not trip on overload until current goes
above 98% of FLC as thermal overload curve starts from 98%.
Common Errors in Pro bus communication:
1. Termination problems:
Lack of terminations at the end of a segment.
inbuilt
Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Starting
state of the motor:
Termination in the middle of a segment (can be caused by
devices with inbuilt termination).
As soon as the motor receives a start command and as per current
drawn by the motor, the relay starts accumulating thermal
memory and during starting if the thermal memory/capacity
reaches 100 % it does not issue a trip command till starting time
(Start Time Set in Relay) expires. Relay issues a trip command
immediately after start time (Start Time Set in Relay) is elapsed on
Thermal Overload Protection.
Double termination,
termination.
caused
by
devices
with
Unpowered terminations (unplugged or unpowered devices).
Incorrectly wired isolating connectors (only becomes a problem
when switched on).
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
227
APPLICATION NOTES
100%
Relay Thermal
Curve
Start Time = 10 Sec
98% of FLC
Motor Current
Thermal
Memory = 100%
Thermal OL
Protection Trip
Figure B-11: Thermal overload during starting state of the motor
Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Running
state of the motor:
Relay starts accumulating thermal memory during starting
condition and gets settle as soon as motor is started successfully.
During running condition if the currents exceeds 98% of FLC the
Thermal Memory start increasing and if the memory reaches 100
% issue a trip command as per the time calculated by the relay.
100%
70%
Relay Thermal
Curve
Start Time = 10 Sec
98% of FLC
Motor Current
Motor Starting
Thermal
O/L Pick Up
Motor Running
Thermal OL
Protection Trip
Thermal Memory
= 100%
Figure B-12: Thermal overload during running state of the motor
Effect on Excessive Start Time Protection due to setting
Iset = 85%:
During excessive start time protection, MCOMP relay checks if the
motor has gone above IFLC and comes back to the Iset or less
than Iset (will be equal to IFLC in case of Iset=100%) as speci ed
by the user within the set starting time (i.e. Time Delay Set in
Relay for Starting Time).
When user is setting Iset = 85%, during Starting MCOMP relay
checks if the motor has gone above IFLC and whether it has come
back to 85% of IFLC within the set starting time. If the current
drawn by the motor after starting time has just elapsed is greater
than 85% of IFLC then MCOMP issues a trip command on
Excessive Start Time Protection.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
228
APPLICATION NOTES
Locked Rotor Protection
Locked rotor during running state of the motor:
MCOMP relay checks if the motor current has gone above the
Locked Rotor Setting in Starting or in Running Condition. The trip
command will be generated by the relay only after speci ed delay
in Lock Rotor Setting; however the relay issues actual trip
command as per following:
During Running Condition if the measured current is greater than
the pick-up set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and issues
a trip command after the Locked Rotor Timer is elapsed provided
the locked rotor condition is persisting at the time of tripping.
J] Watchdog Application
Locked rotor during starting state of the motor:
Case a) Locked rotor condition occurs and resets before
starting time expires: (i.e. during starting state of the motor and
after start command is issued)
If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor
timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till
starting time expires. If the measured current reduces below
Locked Rotor Pickup before the start time is elapsed, locked rotor
timer will get reset and trip will not be issued.
Starting Curve
L.R.
Pickup
Start Time = 10 Sec
Lock Rotor Trip
Delay Timer Starts
L.R. Delay
2 Sec
Lock Rotor Time
Elapsed
Lock Rotor Pickup
Reset
Lock Rotor Plot
Figure B-13: Motor does not trip on locked rotor (Starting state)
Case b) Locked rotor condition occurs and does not reset
before starting time expires:
If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor
timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till
starting time expires. Relay issues a trip command immediately
after start time is elapsed if the current doesn t fall below Lock
Rotor Pickup. Assumption: Starting Time = 10 Sec / Lock Rotor
Trip Delay = 2 Sec.
In the unlikely event of internal relay failure, the relay shall
changeover one of its con gured output contacts so that user can
interpret that the relay has failed, thereby corresponding
corrective or preventive action can be taken. To meet this,
watchdog register is available in MCOMP on Modbus
communication protocol and as well as in MCOMP COMPlogic
input list. This gives the user exibility to con gure the watchdog
bit in any of the Digital output/COMPlogic modules of the
MCOMP. Following 10 individual watchdog error bits & 1
common bit obtained by logically OR all 10 watchdog bits is
available in MCOMPs COMP logic input list.
1.
Vref error of R-Phase Current Channel
2.
Vref error of Y-Phase Current Channel
3.
Vref error of B-Phase Current Channel
4.
Vref error of R-Phase Voltage Channel
5.
Vref error of Y-Phase Voltage Channel
6.
Vref error of B-Phase Voltage Channel
7.
Descriptor Error
8.
ADC Failure
9.
RTC Failure
10. CM detect error
11. Common watchdog bit
User gets exibility to con gure the individual watchdog bits &
the common watchdog bit into COMPlogic modules. These
complogic modules can be assigned to any of the Digital output
of MCOMP to achieve intended functionality.
Starting Curve
L.R.
Pickup
Start Time = 10 Sec
Lock Rotor Trip
Delay Timer Starts
Lock Rotor Time
Elapsed
Lock Rotor
Protection
Tripped
L.R. Delay
2 Sec
Lock Rotor Plot
Motor Trip on Lock Rotor
Figure B-14: Motor tripped on locked rotor (starting state)
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
229
APPLICATION NOTES
Error Name
Vref error
(for all channel)
Possible error Causes
Internal power supply failure.
Component damage to long run
or end of life.
Temperature drift.
Impact on MCOMP operation
Metering of corresponding parameter will not be accurate
and can go random. Subsequently the protection
operation will be affected.
Vref error will get reset after troubleshooting & repairing.
Dry soldering of component short.
Descriptor error
High voltage on EEPROM voltage
supply channel.
High voltage on voltage supply channel will corrupt the
data stored in EEPROM.
Noise on EEPROM data channel.
Noise on data channel will write improper data into
EEPROM.
Component damage.
In case of temporary noise or over voltage on supply,
EEPROM memory will be unavailable for reading or writing
settings & settings will reset to default.
In above case EEPROM will become available for normal
operation again after Power recycle & descriptor error will
get reset.
In case of component failure, Descriptor error will get reset
after hardware repairing.
ADC Failure
High voltage on ADC channel.
Internal module failure.
RTC Failure
RTC battery drained.
RTC module failure
Metering will be unde ned and proper protection
operation cannot be guaranteed.
Thermal overload, Re-acceleration, Max start per hour
calculation fails at power on.
Time stamp will not be accurate
Repairing will be required for resetting error.
CM Detect Error
CT module is not connected.
Issues STOP command if Current Auto Stop is enabled.
CT wire is open or CT module
disconnection.
If current auto stop is disabled, current based protection
will be of ine.
MCOMP Auxiliary power recycling after Reconnecting CT
module cable will reset error.
Table B-6: Cause & e ect matrix for watchdog bits
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
230
APPLICATION NOTES
K] Single Phase Motor Application
Setting Requirement:
MCOMP relay can be used for protecting single phase motor.
There are two ways for connection depending upon the
requirement as follows:
Voltage connect setting in system setting needs to be disabled.
Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:
1. When only current based protection and metering is
required:
Current unbalance
Earth fault
Voltage based protections
Wiring requirement:
The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R
phase of MCOMP current module.
No connection at MCOMP voltage terminals. (Voltage connect
setting should be Disabled in MCOMP relay)
Frequency based protections
Phase loss
Phase reversal
All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the
scheme.
Metering Info:
Reference connection diagram for Current Module connection is
shown below.
Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie
Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:
Voltage, Frequency, Energy, Power, PF, Phase sequence
parameters
VR
VY
VB
VN
R
Y
B
Current Module
Main unit
M
Figure B-15: Single Phase Motor Application 1
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
231
APPLICATION NOTES
2. When current and voltage based protection and
metering is required:
Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:
Current unbalance
Wiring requirement:
Earth fault
The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R
phase of MCOMP current module.
Phase Loss
Voltage Unbalance
Phase and Neutral needs to be connected at MCOMP voltage
terminals as shown in below diagram.
Frequency based protections
Phase Reversal
All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the
scheme.
Reference connection diagram for Current Module and Main unit
connection is shown below.
Metering Info:
Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:
Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie
Setting Requirement:
Phase sequence parameters
Voltage connect setting in system setting needs to be enabled.
Neu
Ph
VR
VY
VB
VN
R
Y
B
Current Module
Main unit
M
Figure B-16: Single Phase Motor Application 2
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
232
REVISION LOG
Rev
A
Description
Released Date
June 2012
Description
Added CE Certi cate and Declaration of Conformity (16 & 17)
Modi ed MCOMP Order Codes (28 - in Introduction)
Modi ed sensing range for Digital Input(31) & added Relay element Communication Failure
(36) in Speci cation
Modi ed Speci cation Labels (41) & added Disposal of the Relay (65) in Installation
Note added for terminal numbers of expandable MCOMP version (11).
Added number of Start Parameter in Monitoring (73 in Metering & Monitoring)
B
January 2013
Added Communication Failure Protection (98 - Protection)
Updated Digital Output settings (104), number of Truth Tables (106), and the List of
COMPlogic Inputs (114) in DIO and COMPlogic)
Modi ed Memory Map and GSD modules for Pro bus (from 147 in Communication)
Added Mode change settings, Communication failure settings, Trip only remote setting, etc.
(from 204 in Setting Sheet)
Added Special Commands table, Inhibit Status table, etc (from 305 in Troubleshooting)
Added Application Notes (309)
Brief changes are:
Introduction: added product overview
codes
gure, expansion DIO description, modi ed order
Speci cations: added 51P, 51N settings in relay elements, modi ed general speci cations,
corrected minor mistakes in settings
Installation: changed display dimension gure, removed product speci cation label, changed
display mounting gure, changed relay main unit overview gure (terminal numbers
changed), added external CT wiring diagram, removed starter types
C
Protections: corrected mistakes in overload trip chart, added IDMT over current protection,
added description in temperature protection
Dec 2015
Communication: removed modbus function codes description, memory map moved to
separate annexure
Settings: added system setting parameter description, digital input/output setting parameter
description, modi ed case studies, modi ed setting sheet for new parameters
User Interface: changed display gure
Testing and troubleshooting : added brief testing methodology
Annexure A Memory Maps: Pro bus output bytes changed, added detailed GSD modules
and input list and their description
Annexure B Application notes : Newly added
Table R-1: Revision log
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
233
NOTES
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
234
NOTES
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
235
NOTES
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
236
Sales Offices - India
Sales Offices - International
Bengaluru
Australia
TAMCO Electrical Industries Australia Pty
Ltd
31 Kitchen Road, Dandenong 3175
Melbourne, Victoria, Australia
Tel:+613 9706 7288
Fax:+613 9706 9112
Email: sales@tamcoaustralia.com.au
www.tamcoaustralia.com.au
Oman
P.O.Box 598, Ruwi, Postal Code-112
Sultanate of Oman
Tel:+968 98034317
Mob:+968 98034317
EMail: ese-oman@Lntebg.com
India
L&T Gate NO. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,
Tower B - 7 th oor, Saki vihar road,
Mumbai 400 072
Tel:+91-22-6705 2813
Fax:+91-22-6705 1024
Email: ese-intl@Lntebg.com
Najma Intersection, Opp: Doha Cinema
C-Ring Road,P.O Box No- 24399
Doha, Qatar
Tel: +974-44-239 000
Fax: +974-44-551 286
Email: ese-qatar@Lntebg.com
Bengaluru 560001
Tel: 080-25020319
Fax: 080-25596397
Email: ese-chn@Lntebg.com
Chennai
L&T Construction Campus
TC-1 Building, II Floor
Mount-Poonamallee Road
Manapakkam, Chennai 600 089
Tel:+91-44-2270 6801
Fax:+91-44-2270 6930
Email: ese-chn@Lntebg.com
Hyderabad
Post Bag 12, Vasantha Chambers
Hyderabad 500 004
Tel: +91-40-6672 0210
Fax: +91-40-2324 2356
Email: ese-hyd@Lntebg.com
Kolkata
Post Bag 619
Kolkata 700 071
Tel. : +91-33-4400 2550 / 2558
Fax. : +91-33-22827587 / 1025
Email: ese-kol@Lntebg.com
Mumbai
L&T Gate No. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,
Tower B - 7 th oor, Saki Vihar road, Powai
Mumbai 400 072
Tel:+91-22-6705 3083
Fax:+91-22-6705 1556
Email: ese-intl@Lntebg.com
New Delhi
Post Bag 6223
32, Shivaji Marg
New Delhi 110 015
Tel: +91-11-4141 9620/9942
Fax: +91-11-4141 9625
Email: ese-del@Lntebg.com
Indonesia
PT. TAMCO Indonesia
F-36, Jalan Jababeka Raya
Jababeka Industrial Estate
Cikarang Utara, Bekasi, 17530,Indonesia
Tel.: +62 21 893 5070
Fax: +62 21 893 5071
Email: sales@tamco.co.id
www.tamco.co.id
Kuwait
Kana Controls General Trading &
Contracting Co. W.L.L
P.O Box: 25593 Safat, 13116
Kuwait
Tel: +965-2474 1373
Faxs: +965-2474 1537
Email: ese-kwt@Lntebg.com
Qatar
Saudi Arabia
L&T Electricals Saudi Arabia Company
Limited - L. L. C
MH-4, Plot: 17+19
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Tel: +966-3-8127708
Fax: +966-3-8127780
Email: Ltesa@Lntebg.com
2203, 22nd Floor
Abu Dhabi, UAE
Tel. : +971-2-676 5988
Fax. : +971-2-676 6399
Email: ese-uae@Lntebg.com
Malaysia
TAMCO SWITCHGEAR (MALAYSIA) SDN
BHD
Sub Lot 24, Lot 16505, Jalan Keluli 1
Section 7
Tel: +603 3361 8200
Fax: +603 3341 6200
Email: tamco@tamco.com.my
www.tamco.com.my
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Electrical Systems & Equipment - Head Of ce
7C, TC II, Tower B, Level 7, L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai, Mumbai 400 072.
Tel: +91-22-6705 1748 Fax: +91-22-6705 1556
Email: ese-cmt@Lntebg.com Website: www.lntebg.com
The information contained herein is correct at time of printing, but as the products and its manufacturing processes are being developed continuously,
this information is subject to change without notice and the company cannot be held liable for any alleged misinterpretation howsoever arising.
Registered Of ce:
L&T House, N. M. Marg
Ballard Estate
Mumbai 400 001, INDIA
MCOMP23.11.2016
Radhadaya Complex, J. P. Road
Vadodara 390 015
Tel: +91-265-66136 37/38
Fax: +91-265-2336 184
Email: ese-vad@Lntebg.com